UBC Publications

UBC Publications

UBC Publications

The University of British Columbia Calendar Aug 30, 1932

Item Metadata

Download

Media
calendars-1.0170069.pdf
Metadata
JSON: calendars-1.0170069.json
JSON-LD: calendars-1.0170069-ld.json
RDF/XML (Pretty): calendars-1.0170069-rdf.xml
RDF/JSON: calendars-1.0170069-rdf.json
Turtle: calendars-1.0170069-turtle.txt
N-Triples: calendars-1.0170069-rdf-ntriples.txt
Original Record: calendars-1.0170069-source.json
Full Text
calendars-1.0170069-fulltext.txt
Citation
calendars-1.0170069.ris

Full Text

Array SI
l^e Mmtoers-ttp
OF
prtttsff) Columbia
imW:
CALENDAR
EIGHTEENTH SESSION
1932-1933
VANCOUVER,   BRITISH   COLUMBIA
1932 W$t Untoersrttp
OF
prtttssf) Columto
CALENDAR
EIGHTEENTH SESSION
1932-1933
VANCOUVER,   BRITISH   COLUMBIA
1932 ^    At CONTENTS
Page
Academic Year  5
Visitor   7
Chancellor  7
President    7
The Board of Governors   7
The Senate   7
Officers and Staff  8
Historical Sketch  15
The Constitution of the University     17
The Work of the University  19
Retiring Allowances   19
Endowments and Donations    20
Suggested Local Scholarships  ;  23
The Library  24
Location and Buildings   26
General Information   40
Admission to the University   45
Registration and Attendance   47
Pees   50
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes   54
Faculty op Arts and Science
Time Table of Lectures     70
Time Table of Supplemental Examinations      74
Regulations in Reference to Courses—
Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A.     75
Courses Leading to the Degree of B.Com     90
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A     93
Teacher Training Course   100
Courses Leading to the Social Service Diploma  102
Examinations and Advancement 103
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Bacteriology   106
"   Botany    108
"   Chemistry     115
" "   Classics     121
" "   Economics, Sociology and Political Science  124
" "   Education  133
"   English   139
" "   Geology and Geography   143
"   History   149
"   Mathematics   157
" "   Modern Languages   162
"   Philosophy   167
"   Physics     170
" "  Zoology    175
Faculty of Applied Science
Foreword     179
Regulations in Reference to Courses   180
General Outline of Courses   184
Courses in—
Chemical Engineering   187
Chemistry   188
Civil Engineering   189 The University of British Columbia
Page
Electrical Engineering   192
Forest   Engineering     193
Geological Engineering   196
Mechanical Engineering   198
Metallurgical Engineering  200, 202
Mining Engineering  202, 203
Nursing and Health   204
Double Courses for the Degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc _ 214
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.Sc   216
Examinations and Advancement  217
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Botany —.  219
"   Chemistry   222
" "   Civil   Engineering     226
" "   Economics    H 237
" "   Forestry     237
" "   Geology and Geography   243
" "   Mathematics   248
" "  Mechanical and Electrical Engineering   250
" "   Mining  and  Metallurgy   262
"  Physics     266
"  Nursing and Health   267
"  Zoology   271
Faculty of Agriculture
Time Table of Lectures   274
Regulations in Reference to Courses—
For the B.S.A. Degree  277
The Occupational Course   277
Short Courses  .  278
Extension Courses   278
Graduate Work   278
Examinations and Advancement   282
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Agronomy   285
"   Animal   Husbandry     287
" "  Dairying   288
"  Horticulture   290
" "   Poultry Husbandry    _ 293
List of Students in Attendance, Session 1931-32   301
Degrees Conferred, 1931   320
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes Awarded, 1931   327
University Summer Session  .  333
Canadian Officers' Training Corps   338
Student Organization  340
Inter-University Exchange of Undergraduates   344
Affiliated Colleges—
Victoria  College   346
Union College of British Columbia  347
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia   348 Academic Year
AUGUST
29th Monday
SEPTEMBER
1st Thursday
5th Monday
14th Wednesday")
ACADEMIC YEAR
1932
Matriculation
tions begin.
Supplemental  Examina-
ACADEMIC YEAR begins.
Labour Day.   University closed.
to
J-Supplemental Examinations in Arts.
21st Wednesday J
20th Tuesday      Supplemental Examinations in Applied
Science begin.
21st Wednesday Last day for Registration of First Year
Students in the Faculties of Arts
and Science, and Agriculture.
Last day for Registration of all other students.
First Year Students in all Faculties report at 2 p.m. in the Auditorium.
The opening addresses to the students of all
the Faculties at 3 p.m. io the Auditorium.
Lectures begin at 9 a.m.
23rd Friday
26th Monday
27th Tuesday
28th Wednesday
OCTOBER
1st Saturday
10th Monday
12th Wednesday
12th Wednesday
14th Friday
15th Saturday
19th Wednesday
26th Wednesday
28th Friday
NOVEMBER
llth Friday
DECEMBER
* 9th Friday
llltYlA M^nda7 ^Examinations.
*22nd Thursday j
14th Wednesday Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Meeting of the Senate.
Christmas Day.    University closed
December 24th-26th, inclusive.
Last day for Registration of Graduate
Students.
Last day for payment of First Term fees.
Thanksgiving Day.    University closed.
Last day for payment of fees for
Autumn Graduation.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Last day for change in Students' courses.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of the Faculty Council.
Remembrance Day.    University closed.
Last day of Lectures for Term.
16th Friday
21st Wednesday
25th Sunday
*These dates are subject to change. The University of British Columbia
JANUARY
1st Sunday
5th Thursday
9th Monday
23rd Monday
1933
New Year's Day.   University closed
Dec. 31st-Jan. 2nd, inclusive.
Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
Second Term begins.
Last day for payment of Second Term fees.
FEBRUARY
8th Wednesday Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and Science
10th Friday Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
15th Wednesday Meeting of the Senate.
24th Friday Meeting of the Faculty Council.
APRIL
13th Thursday
13th Thursday
14th Friday
Last day of Lectures.
Last day for handing in graduation
essays and theses.
Good Friday.    University closed.
15th Saturday to)Segsional Examinations.
29th Saturday   j
Field work in Applied Science begins immediately at the close of the examination
27th Thursday     Last day for payment of Graduation fees.
MAY
8th Monday       Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and
Science.
8th Monday a   Meeting of the Faculty of Agriculture.
10th Wednesday Meeting of the Senate,
llth Thursday     Congregation,
llth Thursday    Meeting of Convocation.
24th Wednesday Victoria Day.   University closed.
JUNE
3rd Saturday     King's Birthday.   University closed.
15th to 30th        Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations.    (Time-tables   to   be   arranged.)
Dominion Day.    University closed.
Summer Session begins.
Summer Session ends.
Meeting of the Faculty of Arts and
Science.
Meeting of the Senate.
ACADEMIC YEAR ends.
JULY
1st Saturday
3rd Monday
AUGUST
19th Saturday
25th Friday
25th Friday
31st Thursday THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH
COLUMBIA
VISITOR
The Hon. J. W. Fordham Johnson, Lieutenant-Governor of
British Columbia.
CHANCELLOR
R. E. McKechnie, Esq., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S.
PRESIDENT
L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction
Publique.
BOARD OF GOVERNORS
R. E. McKechnie, Esq., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S. (ex officio),
(Chairman).
L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A. D.Sc, LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction
Publique.    (ex officio).
B. C Nicholas, Esq., Victoria.   Term expires 1933.
His Honour Joseph N. Ellis, B.C.L., K.C, Vancouver.    Term
expires 1933.   i
W.  H.  Malkin, Esq.,  Vancouver.     Term  expires  1933.
The Hon. Mr. Justice Denis Murphy, B.A., Vancouver.   Term
expires 1935.
*Henry C. Shaw, Esq., B.A., Vancouver.
Mrs. Maude M. Welsh, New Westminster.    Term expires 1935.
Robie L. Reid, Esq., K.C, Vancouver.    Term expires 1937.
Christopher Spencer, Esq., Vancouver.   Term expires 1937.
Francis James Burd, Esq., Vancouver.    Term expires 1937.
SENATE
(a) The Minister  of  Education,  The  Honourable  Joshua  Hinch-
liffe, B.A.
The  Chancellor,  R.   E.  McKechnie,   Esq.,   M.D.,   CM.,   LL.D.,
F.A.C.S.
The President   (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esq.,  M.S.A., D.Sc,
LL.D., Officier de l'Instruction Publique.
(b) Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esq., B.S.A.,
M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock,
Esq., M.A., LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C
*Deceased. The University of British Columbia
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan,
Esq., M.A., Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S.C.
Representatives  of the Faculty of  Agriculture:   E.  A.  Lloyd,
Esq.,  M.S.A.;  G. G. Moe,  Esq.,  B.S.A.,  M.Sc,  Ph.D.
Representatives  of  the  Faculty  of  Applied   Science:   Herbert
Vickers, Esq., M.E., M.Sc, Ph.D.; J. M. Turnbull, Esq.,
B.A.Sc.
Representatives of the Faculty of Arts and Science: Henry F.
Angus, Esq., M.A., B.C.L.; Andrew H. Hutchinson, Esq.,
M.A., Ph.D.
(c) Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council:—
J. Newton Harvey, Esq., Vancouver.
Frank P. Patterson, Esq., M.D., CM., F.R.C.S.E., F.A.C.S.,
Vancouver.
E C Hayward, Esq., B.A., Victoria.
(d) The   Superintendent  of  Education,   S.  J.  Willis,   Esq.,  B.A.,
LL.D.
The Principal of Vancouver Normal School, D. M. Robinson,
Esq., B.A.
The  Principal  of  Victoria  Normal  School,  D.  L.  MacLaurin,
Esq., B.A.
(e) Representative  of   High   School   Principals   and   Assistants,   G.
W. Clark, Esq., M.A.
(/)  Representatives of Affiliated Colleges:—
Victoria College, Victoria, P. H. Elliott, Esq., M.Sc.
Union College of British Columbia, Vancouver  (Theological),
Rev. J. G. Brown, M.A., D.D.
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia, Vancouver, Rev. W. H. Vance, M.A., D.D.
(g)  Elected by Convocation:—
His Honour F. W. Howay, LL.B., F.R.S.C, New Westminster.
G. G. Sedgewick, Esq., B.A., Ph.D., Vancouver.
Sherwood Lett, Esq., B.A., Vancouver.
H. T. Logan, Esq., M.A., Vancouver.
A. E. Lord, Esq., B.A., Vancouver.
His Honour J. D. Swanson, B.A., Kamloops.
G. W. Scott, Esq., B.A., Vancouver.
Mrs. Evlyn F. Farris, M.A., LL.D., Vancouver.
Mrs. Beatrice Wood,  B.A.Sc, Vancouver.
C Killam, Esq., M.A., LL.D., D.C.L., Vancouver.
Miss A.B. Jamieson, B.A., Vancouver.
Sydney Anderson, Esq., B.A.Sc, Vancouver.
W. B. Burnett, Esq., B.A., M.D., CM., Vancouver.
The Most Rev. A. U. de Pencier, M.A., D.D., Vancouver.
Lyle A. Atkinson, Esq., B.S.A., Vancouver. Officers and Staff
OFFICERS AND STAFF
L. S. Klinck, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S.A., D.Sc. (Iowa State College),
LL.D.   (Western   Ontario),   Officier   de   l'Instruction   Publique,
President.
Daniel  Buchanan,   M.A.   (McMaster),   Ph.D.    (Chicago),   LL.D.
(McMaster), F.R.S.C, Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Reginald W. Brock, M.A., LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S., F.R.S.C, Dean
of the Faculty of Applied Science.
F. M. Clement, B.S.A.  (Toronto), M.A.  (Wisconsin), Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A.,   (Toronto), A.M.   (Columbia), Dean of
Women.
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D. Paed. (Queen's),
Director of the Summer Session.
Stanley W. Mathews, M.A. (Queen's), Registrar.
Miss E. B. Abernethy, B.A.  (Brit. Col.), Assistant Registrar.
F. Dallas, Bursar.
John Ridington, Librarian.
FACULTY COUNCIL
The President (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D.,
Officier de l'Instruction Publique.
Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esq., B.S.A.,
M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock, Esq.,
M.A., LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C.
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan, Esq.,
M.A., Ph.D., LL.D., F.R.S.C.
Representative of the Faculty of Agriculture  	
Representative of the Faculty of Applied Science, H. N. Thomson,
B.Sc
Representative of the Faculty of Arts and Science, J. G. Davidson,
B.A., Ph.D.
Emeritus Professor
George E. Robinson, B.A. (Dal.), Emeritus Professor of Mathematics.
Department of Agronomy
G. G. Moe, B.S.A., M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Cornell), Professor and
Head of the Department.
P. A. BOVING, Cand.Ph. (Malmo, Sweden), Cand. Agr. (Alnarp, Agriculture, Sweden), Professor.
D. G. Laird, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S., Ph.D. (Wisconsin), Associate
Professor.
Department of Animal Husbandry
H. M. King, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College),
Professor and Head of the Department. 10 The University of British Columbia
Department of Bacteriology
Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B., M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), LL.D. (Western Ontario), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
(On leave of absence.)
Miss Helen M. Mathews, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
D. C B. Duff, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Instructor.
Department of Botany
Andrew H. Hutchinson, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head of the Department.
Frank Dickson, B.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Cornell), Associate Professor.
John Davidson, F.L.S., F.B.S.E., Associate Professor.
Assistants to be appointed.
Department of Chemistry
Robert H. Clark, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipzig), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
E. H. Archibald, B.Sc (Dal), A.M., Ph.D. (Harvard), F.R.S.E.&C,
Professor of Analytical Chemistry.
W. F. Seyer, B.A., M.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (McGill), Associate Professor.
M. J. Marshall, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology),
Associate Professor.
William Ure, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Cal. Inst, of Technology),
Assistant Professor.
Assistants to be appointed.
Department of Civil Engineering
 Professor   and   Head   of   the
Department.
F. A. Wilkin, B.A.Sc.  (McGill), Acting Head of the Department.
E. G. Matheson, B.A.Sc. (McGill), M.E.I.C, M.Am.S.CE., Associate
Professor.
Allan H. Finlay, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.S. in C.E. (Illinois), Assistant  Professor.
A. Lighthall, B.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor.
A. G. Stuart, B.Sc. (McGill), Instructor.
Edward S. Pretious, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Instructor.
Archie Peebles, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Department of Classics
Lemuel Robertson, M.A.  (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
0. J. Todd, Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor.
H. T. Logan, M.C, B.A. (McGill), M.A.  (Oxon), Professor. Officers and Staff 11
Department of Dairying
Wilfrid Sadler, B.S.A., M.Sc. (McGill), N.D.D., British Dairy Institute, University College, Reading, England, Professor and Head
of the Department.
Department of Economics, Political Science, Commerce and Sociology
Henry F. Angus, B.A. (McGill), B.C.L., M.A. (Oxon.), Professor
and Head of the Department.
W. A. Carrothers, B.A. (Manitoba), Ph.D. (Edinburgh), D.F.C,
Professor.
J. Friend Day, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Chicago), Associate Professor
of Economics and Commerce.
Coral Wesley Topping, B.A. (Queen's), S.T.D. (Wesleyan Theol.
College), A.M., Ph.D. (Columbia), Associate Professor of Economics and Sociology.
G. F. Drummond, M.A. (St. Andrew's), M.Sc. (Econ.), (London),
Assistant Professor.
  Lecturer in Accountancy.
Department of Education
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D. Paed. (Queen's),
Professor and Head of the Department.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Pilcher, B.A., M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M.,
Ph.D. (Stanford), Associate Professor of Psychology and Education.
William G.  Black, B.A.   (Brit.  Col.),  M.A.   (Chicago), Associate
Professor. I
Department of English
G. G. Sedgewick, B.A. (Dal), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor and Head
of the Department.
W. L. MacDonald, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor.
Frederick G. C Wood, B.A. (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Associate
Professor.
Thorleif Larsen, M.A. (Toronto), B.A. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
Francis Cox Walker,  B.A.    (U.N.B.),   A.M.,   Ph.D.    (Harvard),
Associate Professor.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A.  (Toronto), A.M.  (Columbia), Assistant
Professor.    (On leave of absence.)
Hunter Campbell Lewis, M.A.  (Brit. Col.), Assistant Professor. 12 The University of British Columbia
Department of Forestry
H. R. Christie, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Professor and Head of the Department.
F. Malcolm Knapp, B.S.F. (Syracuse), M.S.F. (Wash.), Assistant
Professor.
R. M. Brown, B.ScF. (Toronto), Honorary Lecturer in Forest Products.
Department of Geology and Geography
R. W. Brock, M.A., LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S., F.R.S.C, Professor and
Head of the Department.
S. J. Schofield, M.A., B.Sc.   (Queen's), Ph.D.  (Mass. Institute of
Technology),   F.G.S.A.,   F.R.S.C,   Professor    of    Physical   and
Structural Geology.
M. Y. Williams, B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Yale), F.G.S.A., F.R.S.C,
Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy.
Assistant to be appointed.
Department of History
 Professor   and   Head   of   the
Department.
W. N. Sage, B.A.  (Toronto), M.A.  (Oxon.), Ph.D.   (Toronto), Professor.
F. H. Soward, B.A. (Toronto), B.Litt. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
A. C Cooke, B.A. (Manitoba), M.A. (Oxon.), Assistant Professor.
Department of Horticulture
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Professor and
Head of the Department.
A. F. Barss, A.B.  (Rochester), B.S. in Agr.  (Cornell), M.S.  (Oregon Agricultural College), Ph.D.  (Chicago), Professor.
G. H.  Harris,  B.S.A.   (Brit.   Col.),  M.S.   (Oregon  State  College),
Ph.D. (California), Assistant Professor.
Department of Mathematics
Daniel  Buchanan,  M.A.   (McMaster),   Ph.D.    (Chicago),   LL.D.
(McMaster), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
F. S. Nowlan, B.A.  (Acadia), A.M.  (Harvard), Ph.D.   (Chicago),
Professor.
E. E. Jordan, M.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor.
L. Richardson, B.Sc. (London), Associate Professor.
Frederick J. Brand, B.A. (Brit. Col.), B.Sc. (Oxon.), Instructor. Officers and Staff 13
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
Herbert Vickers, M.E. (Liverpool), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Birmingham),
Professor and Head of the Department.
F. W. Vernon, B.Sc.Eng. (London), Wh.Sch., A.M.I.Mech.E., A.F.R.
A.S., Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering.
H. F. G. Letson, M.C, B.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D., Engineering (London), A.M.I. Mech. E., Associate Professor of Mechanical and
Electrical Engineering
E. Geoffrey Cullwick, M.A. (Cantab.), A.M.I.E.E., Assistant Professor of Electrical  Engineering.
W. B. Coulthard, B.Sc. (London), Assistant Professor of Electrical
Engineering.
John F. Bell, Eng. Capt. O.B.E., R.N., M.E.I.C, Instructor in Mechanical Engineering.
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
J. M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc.  (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
H. N. Thomson, B.Sc (McGill), Professor of Metallurgy.
George A. Gillies, M.Sc.  (McGill), Associate Professor of Mining.
W. B. Bishop, Assistant in Metallurgy.
Department of Modern Languages
H. Ashton, M.A., Litt.D., (Cantab.), D. Litt. (Birmingham), D.
Lett. (Univ. Paris), F.R.S.C, Officier de l'Instruction Publique
(France), Chevalier de la Legion d'Honneur, Professor and
Head of the Department.
David Owen Evans, M.A., Ph.D. (Oxon.), D. Lett. (Univ. of Paris),
Professor of French.
A. F. B. Clark, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor of
French.
Miss Isabel MacInnes, M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (California), Associate Professor of German.
Miss Janet T. Greig, B.A. (Queen's), M.A. (Brit. Col., Officer d'Aca-
demie (France), Assistant Professor of French.
Miss Joyce Hallamore, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor in German.
(On leave of absence.)
Miss Wessie Tipping, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor in French.
Miss Dorothy Dallas, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Instructor in French.
Assistant to be appointed.
Department of Nursing and Health
Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B., M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), LL.D. (Western Ontario), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
(On leave of absence.)
Miss Mabel F. Gray, R.N., Cert.P.H.N. (Simmons College), Assistant Professor of Nursing.
Miss Margaret E. Kerr, B.A.Sc. Nursing (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Columbia), Instructor. 14 The University of British Columbia
Department of Philosophy
H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Professor
and Head of the Department.
James Henderson, M.A. (Glasgow), Professor.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Pilcher, B.A., M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M.,
Ph.D. (Stanford), Associate Professor of Psychology and Education.
Department of Physics
T. C. Hebb, M.A., B.Sc. (Dal), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head
of the Department.
A. E. Hennings, M.A. (Lake Forest College, 111.), Ph.D. (Chicago),
Professor.
J. G. Davidson, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Calif.), Associate Professor.
Gordon Merritt Shrum, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor.
Assistants to be appointed.
Department of Poultry Husbandry
E. A. Lloyd, B.S.A.   (Sask),  M.S.A.  (Washington  State College),
Professor and Head of the Department.
Jacob Biely, M.S.A. (Brit. Col.), M.Sc. (Kansas State Agric. College),
Research Assistant under grant of the National Research Council.
Department of Zoology
C. McLean Fraser, M.A.  (Toronto), Ph.D.   (Iowa), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
G. J. Spencer, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Illinois), Assistant Professor.
Miss Gertrude M. Smith, M.A.   (Brit. Col.), Assistant Professor.
Harold White, M.D., C.M. (McGill), M.D., C.M. (ad eundem Sask.),
D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C Gr. Brit., L.M.C.C, Medical Examiner
to Students.
Mrs. C. A. Lucas, R. N., Public Health Nurse. THE UNIVERSITY  OF BRITISH
COLUMBIA
HISTORICAL SKETCH
The creation of a University in British Columbia was
first advocated by Superintendent Jessop in 1877, but it was
not until 1890 that the Provincial Legislature passed an Act
establishing a body politic and corporate named "The University of British Columbia." In 1891 this Act was amended
to require that a meeting of the Senate be held within one
month after the election of the Senators by Convocation.
The Senators were elected, but a quorum did not assemble
on the date fixed by the Chancellor, Dr. I. W. Powell, of
Victoria. Thus the first attempt to establish a University
in British Columbia failed.
However, some of the work normally done in a University was begun in 1894, when an Act was passed which permitted the affiliation of high schools in the Province with
recognized Canadian Universities. In 1899 Vancouver High
School was affiliated with McGill University in order to
provide First Year work in Arts, and took the name of
Vancouver College. First Year work in Arts was offered
by Victoria High School when it became Victoria College
by affiliation with McGill University in 1902. In the same
year Vancouver College undertook the Second Year in Arts.
In 1906 an Act was passed incorporating the Royal
Institution for the Advancement of Learning of British
Columbia, which, in the same year, established at Vancouver the McGill University College of British Columbia. The
scope of the work undertaken by this college was gradually
increased until at the time it was taken over by the University of British Columbia it was giving three years in Arts
and Science, and two years in Applied Science. When the
University of British Columbia opened in the autumn of
1915, both the McGill University College of Vancouver and
Victoria College, which since 1907 had been a part of it,
ceased to exist. 16 The University of British Columbia
Definite steps to establish the University were taken by
Dr. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, in 1907, when he
introduced a "University Endowment Act." This Act was
followed in 1908 by an Act establishing and incorporating
the University of British Columbia and repealing the old
Act of 1890-1. This Act, with its subsequent amendments,
determines the present constitution of the University.
As authorized by an Act passed by the Provincial Legislature in 1910, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed
a Site Commission to decide upon a site for the proposed
University. The Commission held its first meeting on
May 25th, 1910, in Victoria, and after a thorough
examination of the Province recommended the vicinity
of Vancouver. In the autumn the Executive Council decided to place the University at Point Grey—the site which
the Commission had named as its first choice. In 1911 the
Legislature passed an Act authorizing the Lieutenant-
Governor in Council to grant this site to the University.
The grant was increased in 1915, so that it now consists of
548 acres at the extremity of Point Grey. The waters of
the Gulf of Georgia form more than half the boundary of
the University Campus. A tract of some 3,000 acres of
Government land immediately adjoining the site, and lying
between it and the City of Vancouver, has been set aside
by the Government in order that University revenue may
be provided by its sale or lease.
In February, 1912, the Hon. H. E. Young, Minister of
Education, called for competitive plans which should include plans in detail for four buildings to be erected immediately, and a block plan showing all the proposed buildings on the Campus. Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, of
Vancouver, B.C., were the successful competitors, and were
appointed University architects.
The first Convocation, held on August 21st, 1912, chose
Mr. F. L. Carter-Cotton as first chancellor of the University.   In March, 1913, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council Historical Sketch 17
appointed as President of the University F. F. Wesbrook,
M.A., M.D., CM., LL.D. On April 4th, 1918, Dr. R. E.
McKechnie was elected Chancellor. Dr. McKechnie has
been re-elected continuosly since that date and entered on
his fifth term in May, 1930. On the death of President
Wesbrook, October 20th, 1918, L. S. Klinck, Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture, was appointed acting President, and
on June 1st, 1919, President.
From its opening in 1915 till the Summer of 1925, the
University carried on its work in temporary quarters on
part of the site of the General Hospital in Fairview.
Construction work was commenced on the Science Building at the permanent site in Point Grey in 1914, but was
interrupted because of war conditions. Work on this building was resumed in 1923, and in the Autumn of the same
year the contract was let for the Library. These two buildings, which are of stone and are fireproof, conform closely
to the original plans as prepared by the architects in 1914.
The initial units of these structures, as well as nine other
buildings which are of a less permanent character and are
described at a later page in this Calendar, were completed
in 1925, and at the beginning of Session 1925-26 the University commenced work in its new quarters.
The Inauguration of the new buildings was held on
October 15th and 16th, 1925, on which occasion honorary
degrees were granted by the University for the first time.
THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIVERSITY
The Constitution of the University is governed by the
British Columbia University Act B.C.R.S. 1924 c. 265, and
amending Acts, which provide
That the University shall consist of a Chancellor, Convocation, Board of Governors, Senate, the Faculty
Council, and the Faculties; that the first Convocation shall consist of all graduates of any university in
His Majesty's dominions resident in the Province two 18 The University of British Columbia
years prior to the date fixed for the first meeting of
Convocation, together with twenty-five members selected by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council. After
the first Convocation it shall consist of the Chancellor, Senate, members of the first Convocation, and all
graduates of the University; that the Chancellor shall
be elected by Convocation; that the Board of Governors shall consist of the Chancellor, President, and
nine persons appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor
in Council; that the Senate shall consist of: (a) The
Minister of Education, the Chancellor, and the President of the University, who shall be Chairman thereof; (6) the deans and two professors of each of the
Faculties elected by members of the Faculty; (c)
three members to be appointed by the Lieutenant-
Governor in Council; (d) the Superintendent of Education, the principals of the normal schools; (e) one
member elected by the high-school principals and assistants who are actually engaged in teaching; (/)
one member elected by the Provincial Teachers' Institute, organized under subsection (e) of section 8
of the "Public Schools Act"; (g) one member to be
elected by the governing body of every affiliated college or school in this Province; (h) fifteen members
to be elected by Convocation from the members
thereof.
It is further provided that the University shall be non-
sectarian.
The University Act gives the University full powers to
grant such degrees in the several Faculties and different
branches of knowledge as the Senate may from time to
time determine. It reserves for the University the sole
right in this Province to confer degrees, except in Theology,
and it expressly enacts that "No other university having
corporate powers capable of being exercised within the
Province shall be known by the same name, nor shall any
such university have power to grant degrees." Retiring Allowances 19
THE WORK OF THE UNIVERSITY
The University of British Columbia is an integral part
of the public educational system of the Province, and its
function is to complete the work begun in the public and
high schools. It is the policy of the University to promote
education in general, and in particular to serve its constituency through three channels—teaching, research, and
extension work.
As regards teaching, the University furnishes instruction in the various branches of a liberal education and in
those technical departments which are most directly related
to the life and industries of the Province. The scope of
the teaching activity of the University is fully described
in Sec. 9 of the Act.
In order to make the teaching of the University more
vital and for the advancement of knowledge, research is
encouraged in every department.
The people of the Province are informed of the results
of special work by the staff of the University through a
system of extension lectures. The University sends lecturers to various parts of the Province during the examination weeks in December and April. In the case of
places which can be visited without prejudice to the duties
of the lecturer at the University, lectures are arranged to
take place during the University term. A list of subjects
and lecturers can be obtained on application to the Secretary of the Extension Lecture Committee, through whom
all arrangements are made.
RETIRING ALLOWANCES
In March, 1924, the Board of Governors of the University of British Columbia adopted the contributory plan of
retiring allowances for members of the teaching staff.
Contracts are placed with the Teachers' Insurance and Annuity Association of America, a corporation made possible
by the Carnegie Corporation "to provide insurance and an- 20 The University of British Columbia
nuities for teachers and other persons employed by colleges,
by universities, or by institutions engaged primarily in
educational or research work."
In May, 1924, the University of British Columbia was
elected as a member of the list of institutions associated
with the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of
Teaching and received a grant of $50,000.00, payable in
ten annual installments, for the purpose of providing supplementary annuities for the older professors of the institution.
ENDOWMENTS AND DONATIONS
In anticipation of endowments the Act provides that:
"Any person or corporation may, with the approval of the Senate,
found one or more professorships, lectureships, fellowships,
scholarships, exhibitions, prizes, or other awards in the University, by providing a sufficient endowment in land or other
property, and conveying the same to the University for such
purposes, and every such endowment of lands or other property shall be vested in the University for the purpose or
purposes for which it is given."
Only a limited number are in a position to make endowments, but many—including alumni and friends of higher
education—may add greatly to the usefulness of the University by making contributions that lie within their power.
It is gratifying to note that the number of those who assist
in this way has been constantly growing.
It has become a tradition for each Graduating Class to
make a gift to the University. In the spring of 1931 this
gift took the form of a collection of books, periodicals,
manuscripts, Indian handicrafts, and relics, all relating to
British Columbia's early history.
The removal of the University to its permanent home
in Point Grey has greatly stimulated interest in its welfare and progress, and within the last few years many valuable donations have been received, especially in the form
of equipment for the various Laboratories.
Among the notable gifts received by the Library was
a special Memorial Edition of the "Tripitaka," the Bud- Endowments and Donations
21
dhist scriptures. This consisted of forty-seven volumes,
beautifully printed in the characteristic Siamese type, and
was donated by the present Emperor of Siam, in remembrance of his brother, Rama VI. The gift was presented
to the Chancellor at a special meeting of the Library Committee by Captain W. L. M. Watson-Armstrong, Siamese
Consul-General.
A list of the other most important gifts received during
last year is given below under the various departments.
Department of Botany
(For Herbarium and Botanical Gardens)
SEEDS
CANADA B.   O.   Iverson,  Wardner,   B.C.
John  Ronayne,  Pemberton  Meadows,  B.C.
Prof. H.  B.  Sifton,  University of Toronto, Toronto.
Boyee Thompson, Arboretum, Yonkers, N.Y.
Beal Botanic Garden, Michigan.
Brooklyn Botanic Garden,  Brooklyn.
Marsh  Botanical  Garden,  Yale University.
United States Department of Agriculture,  Washington,  D.C.
W. Thomas, Alamos, Sonora.
Botanical Garden of Montevideo.
Department of Agriculture, Bermuda.
Botanic Gardens,  Glasgow, Scotland.
Botanic Gardens,  Glasnevin, Ireland.
Hurst and Son, England.
Royal  Botanic Garden,  Edinburgh,  Scotland.
Royal Botanic Garden,  Kew, England.
Lloyd Botanic Garden, Darjeeling.
W.   Walbeck,  Borga.
Botanical   Garden,   Lund.
Jardin Botanique de  Copenhague.
Botanical Garden,  Amsterdam.
Arboretum   Landbouwhoogeschool,  Wageningen.
Jardin   Botanique de  l'Universite de Liege.
Museum d'Historie Naturelle,  Paris.
Botanical Garden,  University of Valencia.
Jardim  Botanico  da  Universidade  de  Coimbra.
Botanischen  Gartens,  Basel.
Mestska  Botanica  Skolni  Zahrada.
Gartens und Museums  Berlin-Dahlem.
Botanischer  Garten   der  Stadt  Kassel,   (Cassel).
Botanischen Gartens, Bremen.
Botanical Gardens, Koln am Rhein.
Botanical Garden, University of Bucarest.
Botanical Garden, University of Central Asia, Taschkent.
Botanic  Garden,  University of Latvia, Riga.
Botanical   Garden,   Kamianetz-Podilskyj,   Ucraina.
Botanical  Gardens,   Kaunas,  Lithuania.
SPECIMENS
Mrs. R. Foord, Faulkner, Manitoba.—Pitcher Plants.
Commonwealth  Forestry Bureau,  Canberra,  Australia.—Herbarium  collection  of
Australian trees.
UNITED STATES
MEXICO
URUGUAY
WEST INDIES
GREAT  BRITAIN
FINLAND
SWEDEN
DENMARK   ^
HOLLAND
BELGIUM
FRANCE
SPAIN
PORTUGAL
SWITZERLAND
CZECHOSLOVAKIA
GERMANY
ROUMANTA
POLAND
RUSSIA 22 The University op British Columbia
Department of Forestry
Dominion Forest Service:
Ottawa—Forestry publications; set of lantern slides from photomicographs of wood
sections.
New Westminster—Tree seeds.
Dominion Parks Branch, Ottawa—Publications.
Dominion Bureau of Statistics,  Ottawa—Publications.
National Development Bureau,  Ottawa—Publications.
Dominion Department of Agriculture, Ottawa—Publications.
B.   C.  Forest  Branch, Victoria—Publications;  set of  stem  sections  of less  common
B. C. woods.
Ontario Forest Branch, Toronto—Publications.
Finland Forest Service,  Helsinki—Publications.
New Zealand Forest  Service,  Wellington—Publications.
Philippine Bureau of Forestry, Manila—Set of board samples of Philippine woods.
South Africa Forest Service—Publications.
Sweden Forest Service—Publications.
United States Department of Agriculture and Forest Service—Publications.
United   States   Pacific   Northwest  Forest  Experiment   Station,   Portland—Charts   and
photostats of logging time studies and costs.
West Australia Forest Service—Publications.
Yale University Forest School—Publications.
American Tree Association,  Washington—Publications.
Canadian Bank of Commerce,  Toronto—Publications.
Canadian Ingersoll, Rand,  Sherbrooke,  Quebec—Publications.
Canadian Pacific Railway, Montreal—Publications.
Canadian  Pulp  &   Paper  Association,  Montreal—Publications.
Caterpillar Tractor Company, San Leandro,  Cal.  and Morrison Tractor &
Equipment Co., Vancouver—Publications and pictures.
Henry Disston  & Sons, Inc., Philadelphia—Publications.
J. H. McDonald, Manager B. C. Manufacturing Co.—Samples of New Zealand woods.
National  Lumber Manufacturers  Association, Washington—Publications.
Pacific  Lumber Inspection  Bureau,  Inc.,  Seattle—Publications.
Touring Club of Italy, Milano—Publications.
Department of Geology and Geography
Dean R. W. Brock—Collection of rocks and ores from Finland  and Northern Scandinavia.    Fossil sharks teeth from Malta.
Dr. William F. Coy—Collection of Minerals.
R. A. Cumming—Porpoise skull from Sea Island.
Dr. G. W. Darby—Indian masks, bow and arrow and bird's foot pouch.
Professor G.  A. Gillies—Indian  artifacts from  Vancouver and vicinity.
G. M. Goodrich, Williams Lake—Indian skull from a gravel mound at Williams
Lake.
Dr.  J.  A. Kania—Collection of rocks  and fossils  from  Illinois.
H.  Kellet—Fossil leaves,  shells and concretions  from  Kitsilano  and  Stanley  Park
beaches.
T. P. O. Menzies—"Museum Notes."
Mrs. J. R. Morgan—Collection of fossils  from Moresby Island.
Kenneth Racey—Indian skull from Tofino, Vancouver Island.
Mrs. Oscar V. White—Collection of ores from the Slocan.
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
Ruth-Hope Mining Co.,  Sandon, B.C.; R. H.  Stewart, Manager—Ope ton Silver-lead
ore.
Silver King  (Tulameen)  Mining Co., W. B. Dornberg, Manager—One ton Silver-lead
ore;  one high grade ore  specimen.
Magazines—Compressed  Air  Magazine,   New  York.     The  Excavating  Engineer   Pub.
Co.,  Chicago.
Department of Zoology
Dr. D. S.  Pirie,  New Westminster—Bush Tit's  nest.
D.  Turner,  New Westminster—30  mink carcases for dissection.
Dr. M.  Y. Williams, Vancouver—Series  of Tsetse flies.
R.  Hopping,  Vernon—Collection of named  Coleoptera.
W.   Macallum,   Vancouver—Voluntary  assistance  in   labelling  collections.
A.  C.  Cumming  and K.  Racey.   Vancouver—Further  collections  of Mallophaga.
W. Downes,  Victoria—Mounted specimens of  Siphonaptera.
Mrs. A. McDougall Patterson, New Westminster; R. Glendenning, Agassiz—Collection
of mounted Aphididae.
R. C. Asher, New Westminster—Samples of insect poisons. Admission at the Inns op Court 23
Gifts of old postage stamps for the University collection of "The Postage Stamps
of Canada," have been  received from:
H. E. Ducommun.
G. C. Hewer, Vancouver.
B. C. Berger, Vancouver.
SUGGESTED LOCAL SCHOLARSHIPS
As the number of Matriculation Scholarships offered at
present is quite inadequate to the needs of the Province,
a scheme which has great possibilities, both for the growth
of the University and the prosperity of the Province is
earnestly recommended to consideration.
In the large universities, both of Great Britain and the
United States, local or district scholarships have proved
a strong bond between the community and the University,
have brought the University close to the life of the young,
and opened up the prospect of a University education to
many who would not otherwise have contemplated it.
Such local or district scholarships might be established
as Matriculation Scholarships, by City or Municipal Councils or other public bodies, or by private benefactors. They
would be awarded by a local authority, but the University
would reserve the right of confirmation.
In awarding such scholarships, standing in the Matriculation Examination need not be the only consideration.
It is desirable that regard should be had also to financial
circumstances, character, and intellectual promise. Scholarships may be offered for students taking a particular course,
and in this way the study of such sciences and technical
branches of knowledge as have special importance for the
industries of the district may be encouraged. In short,
local scholarships may be arranged to meet local needs and
to prepare the native sons of the Province to play their
part in the development of its resources.
ADMISSION   AT   THE   INNS  OF   COURT
The University of British Columbia has been approved
by the Council of Legal Education in England, and its degree examinations qualify its students for admission at
any one of the four Inns of Court. 24 The University of British Columbia
This recognition is a great advantage to graduates of
The University of British Columbia who wish to read Law
and obtain Call to the Bar in England. It is particularly
useful to Rhodes Scholars who are often students at the
Inns of Court concurrently with their work at Oxford in
the final Honours School of Jurisprudence or in preparation for the degree of B.C.L.
THE LIBRARY
The University Library consists of 82,500 volumes and
about 10,000 pamphlets. It includes representative works
in all the courses off ered by the University, and a growing
collection of works on other subjects.
The Library receives regularly about 550 magazines and
periodical publications.
The book collection is classified throughout on the Congressional system.
Books can be borrowed by students for a period of seven
days, or for a shorter time should the work be in general
demand. Books to which the teaching staff have specially
referred their students are placed in a "Reserved" class.
These are shelved apart from the main collection, and are
loaned only for use in the building, and for a limited period
of two hours. They may, however, be taken from the
Library for over-night loan, or for any period in which the
Library is closed. In these cases they are returnable
before 9 a.m., or, in the case of students of classes meeting
at 8:45 a.m., before 10 a.m.
Unbound periodicals are not loaned. Bound periodicals,
and books that are costly, rare, or unsuitable for general
circulation, are loaned only under special conditions.
While the Library is primarily for the staff and students
of the University, its resources are available to those of the The Library 25
general public engaged in research or special study, and who
make personal application to the Librarian for the privilege
of its use. Such persons are known as "Extra-mural
Readers." By order of the Board of Governors, a fee of
$1.00 per calendar year is charged such readers. In addition,
they pay necessary mailing costs, a deposit being required
from those unable to call personally for books loaned.
During the session the Library is open on week days
from 8:45 a.m. to 9:45 p.m., except on Saturdays, when the
hour of closing is 5 p.m. In vacation it is open from 9 a.m.
to 4 p.m., except on Saturdays, when the hours are from 9
a.m. to noon.*
The University is deeply indebted to all who have made
gifts to the Library during the past year. These have been
both valuable and numerous. Their number prevents detailed
acknowledgment, but recognition should be made of a number of sets of transactions, and complete or partial sets of
scientific periodicals, given by societies and friends of the
University.
*It may. be necessary to charge these hours. LOCATION AND BUILDINGS
LOCATION
The University is situated on the promontory which
forms the western extremity of the Point Grey Peninsula.
On three sides it is bounded by the Gulf of Georgia. The
site comprises an area of 548 acres, of which approximately
one-half is campus. In all directions appear snow-capped
mountains, strikingly rugged and impressive.
BUILDINGS
The buildings, planned to meet the requirements of fifteen hundred students, are of two classes, permanent and
semi-permanent. The former were designed by the University architects, Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, the latter
by architects of the Department of Public Works of the
Provincial Government. The permanent buildings have
been erected in the location originally assigned for them;
the others in the quadrangle designated as "unassigned"
in the original plan. By utilizing the "unassigned" area
for the semi-permanent buildings, all the locations intended
for future expansion have been left available.
The entire mechanical equipment of these buildings was
designed after a close study had been made not only of
present requirements, but of the ultimate development of
the institution. This consideration accounts for the fact
that only a part of the present equipment is permanent.
After a careful survey of the whole system, a forced hot
water system was found to present advantages that made
its adoption advisable. Direct radiation with a system of
warmed air supply and extraction for ventilation is used
to take care of the heat losses in the buildings. A separate
system of ventilation is installed for all sanitary conveniences, and a specially constructed system for fume closets.
The various services throughout these buildings, such as
hot and cold water, distilled water, gas and steam for laboratory purposes, compressed air, etc., with the necessary ap- Location and Buildings 27
paratus, are all of a modern type. An attempt has been
made to reduce vibration and noise to a minimum by installing all moving apparatus on floating slabs, with a
further insulation of cork.
The plan at the back of the Calendar shows the buildings which have been erected and indicates the nature of
their construction. It also shows their relation to the other
groups of buildings which are to be erected in the future.
PERMANENT BUILDINGS
Of the twelve buildings which have been erected, three
are of fire-proof construction, the Science Building, the
Library, and the Power House.
Science Building
The Science Building has been designed in the Tudor
style, this being a phase of English Gothic which lends itself fairly readily to those adaptations which are necessary
in order to meet modern collegiate requirements. Externally, British Columbia granite has been used throughout.
Wherever possible plain wall surfaces, consisting of the
split faces of granite arranged in random sizes with white
joints, have been used. The general grey tone is relieved
by the use of a small quantity of field stone of darker
shades. All window openings are filled with leaded glass
in steel sashes. Internally, the building is finished in brick
work and tiles in pleasing tones of brown which harmonize
with the oak panelled doors, the total effect in keeping
with that of the period it is designed to represent.
This building accommodates the Departments of Chemistry, Physics, Bacteriology and Nursing and Health. One
and one-half floors are devoted to Chemistry; an equivalent
assignment of space has been allotted to Physics, and half
of one floor has been set aside for Bacteriology, and Nursing
and Health. All lecture rooms and laboratories are well
lighted, and a system of forced ventilation has been installed throughout the   entire   building.    Distilled   water, 28 The University of British Columbia
gas, steam, compressed air, and electrical supply circuits
have been provided wherever required. These services are
carried in trenches in the floor, an arrangement which facilitates any necessary repairs.
Ample provision has also been made for offices, balance
rooms, preparation rooms, apparatus rooms, supply rooms,
photographic rooms, technicians' rooms, and reading-room
for students.
Chemistry.—This Department is equipped with one
large and one small lecture room, a large laboratory for
general chemistry accommodating three hundred and forty
students, laboratories for elementary and advanced qualitative and quantitative analysis, an elementary organic
laboratory, an advanced organic laboratory and an organic
combustion laboratory. A laboratory is available for agricultural chemistry, another for industrial chemistry, and a
commodious laboratory for physical chemistry with an adjoining dark room for work in photo-chemistry is found on
the third floor. There are also several small laboratories
well equipped for research work.
Physics.—The Department of Physics has two large
and one small lecture rooms, four large and several smaller laboratories, a constant temperature room, a battery
room, an apparatus room and an instrument maker's shop.
Two of the large laboratories are equipped for the study
of Elementary Physics, while the other two are used for
intermediate work in Mechanics, and Heat and Electricity.
A number of the smaller laboratories have adjoining photographic dark rooms and are used for more advanced work
in light, X-rays and Spectroscopy. Some of the small laboratories are specially equipped for research work in the
various branches of Physics.
Bacteriology.—Provision has been made in this Department for four laboratories. Two of these are for general
student use, one is for serological work and one is for advanced research.    In addition to   laboratory   and   lecture Location and Buildings 29
room accommodation, an office, a preparation room and a
sterilization room have been provided.
Nursing and Health.—The three rooms assigned to this
Department constitute a teaching unit such as is provided
in modern training schools for the instruction of nurses.
All the equipment necessary for the demonstration of elementary nursing procedure is available, and can be used
for practice teaching purposes.
Library Building
The central unit of the Library Building is a massive
structure of British Columbia granite which harmonizes
with the Science Building in its Gothic architectural lines.
Owing to the exigencies of the plan, however, the massing
is more broken, and thus better effects of light and shade
are obtained. Some tracery and stained glass in the Upper
portion of the building is employed to obtain in a restricted
manner the richness of detail characteristic of this style of
architecture.
Internally the same effect has been striven for, wherever such an end was possible with due regard to economy.
The Main Entrance Hall has a groined ceiling with arches
and wall surface finished in Caen Stone plaster. This treatment is carried up to the Main Concourse floor through the
staircase Hall; the lower portion of the Concourse walls is
plastered with Caen Stone, the quoins to windows and doors,
and corbels to roof trusses being finished in the same material. The roofs of the Concourse and of the two reading
rooms adjacent are finished in native woods stained a dark
brown, with patterae and shields picked out in bright heraldic colours. Windows throughout the building are of leaded
glass. In the Concourse and the inner hall this is of a pale
amber shade, with the coats of arms of the Canadian Universities worked into the centre light. On the window
above the Loan Desk on the East Side of the Concourse the
armorial bearings of Oxford and Cambridge, as the oldest 30 The University of British Columbia
universities of the Empire, are used as flanking emblems to
those of the University of British Columbia. The floors of
the Main Entrance Hall staircases and of the Concourse are
finished with large marbled rubber tiles which harmonize
with the general colour scheme, and ensure quietness in the
principal parts of the building. Plain oak of simple detail,
stained to represent old fumed oak, is used throughout for
doors and other wood finish.
The principal reading room has a floor space of 100 ft.
by 50 ft. and is 60 ft. in height. Two other reading rooms,
each 60 ft. by 30 ft., open off the main reading room. These
rooms provide accommodation for 250 students. The sixth
and seventh tiers of the stack, not being required at present
to house the University book collection, are used as a periodical room, and will accommodate about fifty readers. The
Stack, which occupies the entire rear of the building, consists of seven tiers, four of which are fully equipped with
steel stacks of the latest design. Here fifty-two semi-
private study "carrels" facilitate research for advanced
students. The offices of the Librarian and the Library Staff
provide ample accommodation for receiving, cataloguing
and accessioning. The Faculty common room, the "Browsing" room, and the Frank Burnett museum are also located in this building. The Burnett collection represents
the arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia. This collection, which has been presented by Mr. Burnett to the
University, is the result of numerous voyages made by him
to the Central and South Pacific Islands. It constitutes one
of the finest collections of this class of material yet accumulated by any private collector.
Power House
The Power House has been placed in the centre of the
space which will ultimately be the Engineering Quadrangle,
and will therefore eventually be masked by the future permanent buildings towards the Mall.   For this reason it does Location and Buildings 31
not pretend to follow very closely the style of the other
permanent buildings except in mass, being finished in rough
case of broken texture, relieved with red quarry tiles as
diapers, copings, and offsets, with windows grouped as far
as possible to give pleasing proportions of voids and solids.
The ultimate development of this plant will be 2500
horsepower at normal rating. The present installation consists of three units, each of 250 horse-power normal rating,
capable of developing 100 per cent, in excess of this. Each
unit, so equipped as to operate independently of the others,
may act as a service as well as an experimental station. In
other words, on any one boiler an experimental test may
be conducted while the rest of the plant is cut in on the
service lines. Instruments are provided to record every
operation so that close checking and comparisons of the
performance of the different types of boilers may be made
to a degree.
The B. & W. Unit is equipped with B. & W. Natural
Draft Stoker, the Sterling Boiler with forced draft Coxe
Travelling Grate. The Kidwell with forced draft Coxe
Travelling Grate is also equipped with air pre-heater, bypassed, so that tests may be conducted with or without preheated air. Induced draft is used with individual forced
draft fans; separate boiler feed lines and pump with Line-
hart Scale provide boiler feed for tests. A travelling weigh
scale records the amount of coal used, while a steam jet ash
conveyor elevates the ashes to an over-head bunker.
The efficiency and flexibility of the plant lends itself to
economical operation, while the knowledge gained in the
use of different appliances will be of interest and value to
power plant users.
SEMI-PERMANENT BUILDINGS
In this group there are ten buildings in all—Administration, Auditorium and Grill room, Arts, Applied Science,
Agriculture;  three Engineering  Buildings — Mechanical, 32 The University of British Columbia
Electrical; Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics; the Forest
Products Laboratory Building and the Gymnasium. These
buildings, which are set on concrete foundations, are of
frame construction with stucco finish, and are designed for
a life of forty years. Their exterior design harmonizes
with the permanent buildings so far as materials of construction will permit. With the exception of a part of
the Engineering Laboratories, these buildings have been
finished internally with plaster and fir trim.
Administration Building
On the ground floor of this building are situated the offices of the President, the Dean of the Faculty of Arts and
Science, the Registrar, and the Bursar. On the second
floor are two large rooms, one for meetings of the Board
of Governors and the Senate, and the other for meetings
of Faculties and Committees.
Auditorium Building
The Auditorium Building is designed in a pleasing treatment of Renaissance architecture and is furnished with the
most modern equipment. It has a seating capacity of 1029,
a large and admirably • equipped stage for the encouragement of dramatic presentations, an orchestra pit and adequate off-stage dressing rooms. Provision has been made
for the operating of moving pictures, and the stage is
equipped with a cyclorama and all necessary electrical illumination devices.
The Grill room is situated in the basement and is designed to accommodate 400 students at one time. There is
also a small dining room for the Faculty. The kitchen is
furnished with the latest cooking and baking equipment.
The bookstore, post office, medical offices, women's rest
room, students' council offices, and numerous committee
rooms for subsidiary organizations are also located in this
building. Location and Buildings 33
Arts Building
In the Arts Building, which forms the centre of the
semi-permanent group, are located the lecture rooms and
offices for the following Departments in the Faculty of Arts
and Science: Classics, Economics, Sociology and Political
Science, Education, English, History, Mathematics, Modern
Languages and Philosophy.
The lecture rooms, 16 in number, are well designed and
exceptionally well lighted. The largest room accommodates
250 students; the seating capacity of the others ranges
from 32 to 64. Four common rooms for the undergraduates in Arts and Science are located in this building, as
is also the office of the Dean of Women.
Applied Science Building
This building houses the Departments of Geology,
Botany, Zoology, Forestry and the drafting rooms and offices for Civil Engineering. All the laboratories have been
equipped with the essential services. One large lecture
room, providing accommodations for 250 students, and 11
smaller lecture rooms with a seating capacity ranging from
25 to 112, are located in this building. These will be used
by the different Departments jointly as class requirements
may determine. Extensive provision has been made for
drafting rooms and for the necessary offices, preparation
rooms, storage rooms, and photographic rooms. A geological museum, a reading room and a common room for students have also been provided.
Geology.—In addition to the necessary lecture rooms,
the Department of Geology has three large and well equipped laboratories, the Mineralogical, the Petrological and
the Geological. There are also two small research laboratories, one for graduate students and one for the Staff.
The Department workroom is well equipped for the preparation of specimens. The museum contains valuable collections of illustrative material which supplements the ex- 34 The University of British Columbia
tensive working collections in the laboratories. The reading room is equipped with books, separates, maps, photographs and slides for reference.
Botany.—The Botanical laboratories include a large
junior laboratory, a senior laboratory, two student research
laboratories and three private research rooms. These laboratories are used for practical work in Botany and General
Biology. A Herbarium of over 15,000 sheets and a botanical garden containing over 1000 specimens of native plants
furnish an abundance of material for class room and laboratory purposes.
Zoology.—This Department, which includes courses in
Entomology, has two large laboratories, a small research
laboratory and two private laboratories, all well equipped.
There is also a room for class material, which will serve
for a time as a repository for museum collections and for
specimens to be used for illustration.
Forestry.—While the Department of Forestry has its
own laboratory for work in wood technology, its own class
room and offices, it uses the laboratories of other Departments quite extensively, notably those in Biology, Civil
Engineering and Forest Products. The Department possesses, in the forest belt which has been preserved on the
campus as a natural park, a very valuable outdoor laboratory for forestry students.
Civil Engineering.—Well equipped and well lighted
draughting and designing rooms are available for all classes
in drawing, mapping, machine design and computation
work. The equipment necessary for all types of Civil Engineering work is available. The hydraulic laboratory, which
is situated in the Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building, is well equipped for demonstrations and tests covering
the main field of hydraulic principles and machinery; while
in the Forest Products Laboratory, which is at the dis- Location and Buildings 35
posal of students in Civil Engineering, excellent facilities
are   available   for   extensive tests of timber, cement and
steel.
Agriculture Building
This building accommodates the Departments of Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and
Poultry Husbandry. The office and record rooms for the
Farm Survey studies are also located in this building.
The lecture rooms, of which there are three, are exceptionally well lighted. The largest accommodates 112 students, while the seating capacity of the others ranges from
36 to 54.
In addition to lecture and laboratory accommodation,
provision has been made for the necessary offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms and also for a photographic
dark room, a herd book room, and a students' common room.
Agronomy.—The laboratories of this Department are
provided with adequate equipment for studies in soil, field
husbandry and plant breeding problems. Additional space
is available in the Agronomy Building for studies in the
classification and grading of field crops.
Animal Husbandry.—The different classes and types of
livestock constitute the main laboratory material of this
department. In this material and in the farm survey records, the Department possesses equipment for teaching and illustration in farm management, livestock management, feed and nutrition, and studies in pedigree and breeding.
Dairying. — The laboratories of the Department of
Dairying provide facilities for the training of students in
Dairy Science. 36 The University of British Columbia
Horticulture.—In this Department facilities are provided for demonstration and student practice in the propagation, planting, pruning and general care of horticultural crops. Laboratory materials for these purposes are
provided from the orchard, the garden, the nurseries, the
campus plantings, and the recently built greenhouse range
which consists of several sections devoted to practical
horticulture or used for special plant studies.
The well-equipped research laboratory in the Agriculture Building also enables both undergraduate and
graduate students to receive training in the technique of
plant research.
Poultry Husbandry.—In the poultry laboratories facilities, materials and equipment are provided to assist in
the study of poultry nutrition, disease, breeding, marketing and other problems related to the industry.
Mechanical and Electrical Buildings
The Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering is housed in two large buildings. In both will be
found the most up-to-date equipment, enabling students to
obtain a thorough experimental knowledge of all phases of
the work in these departments. The mechanical laboratory contains a modern 3-ton CO2 refrigerating plant; a
large Corliss engine; a two-stage air-compressor with inter-cooler; a 50 H.P. Mirrlees Bickerton & Day pure Diesel
engine with Froude water brake; a De Laval Steam Turbine and D. C. generator with condenser; a gasoline engine
and generator; a Crossley two-stroke oil engine and a National gas engine. A complete equipment exists for testing
calorific values of fuel oils and coals, and also for testing
exhaust gases of engines. There are also two steam
engines, one a single cylinder engine, and the other a compound engine. The mechanical students have available
also the powerhouse equipment for testing, which consists
of three 250 H.P. boilers—a Kidwell, a Babcock & Wilcox, Location and Buildings 37
and a Sterling. In addition, a 250-K.W. compound engine
and generator and every variety of pump is available for
experimental work.
The Electrical laboratory is entirely modern, and contains a 3-phase synchronous motor, driving a 75-K.W. compound wound generator with static balancer. There is a
three-phase rotary converter with reactance control and
panels, and a Deri brush-shifting repulsion motor; a three-
phase shunt commutator motor of the Schrage type, several
squirrel cage and slipring induction motors, a three-phase
alternator and D.C. motor; two-level compound D.C. generators on the same base. Another machine, specially designed for us by the Cerlikon Company serves as three-
phase shunt and series commutator motor, single-phase
repulsion, three-phase induction motor, three-phase rotary
converter, and is intended to illustrate the principles of
most of the A.C. commutator motors. There is also a small
induction motor with a condenser attached to illustrate
power factor improvement.
There are also series, shunt and compound wound D.C.
motors and an induction regulator, a single-phase rotary
converter; a Winter-Eichberg single-phase commutator
motor; several transformers; a mercury-arc rectifier; an
oscillograph of the Duddell type; a cathode-ray oscillograph
of the General Electric type; a Campbell inductometer and
complete equipment for high frequency bridge-testing. An
alternating current potentiometer made by Tinsley, Gall's
patent, exists for standardizing work, and also vacuum tube
instruments for obtaining characteristics of tubes. In addition, a large amount of equipment is available for carrying out all the junior tests, including potentiometers,
standard bridges, iron testing, Epstein iron tester, ballistic
galvanometers and other instruments.
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building
The Mining and Metallurgical laboratories cover a total
area of 5000 square feet.    The Ore  Dressing  laboratory, 38 The University of British Columbia
which includes a workshop, storage room and flotation
room, is well equipped with a variety of small scale
machines, including crusher, rolls, screens, jigs, ball mill
and tables. The laboratory is fully wired for power and
light, and has large water mains and drains, and a two-
ton travelling crane. The Metallurgical laboratory includes
a fire assay room, with oil, gasoline and gas furnaces; a
wet assay room, with large fan-draught hood, and work
benches fitted for electric and gas heating; two balance
rooms; a photographic dark room; and ample storage space.
The Hydraulics laboratory is well equipped for tests
and demonstrations of high and low pressure hydraulic
machines and pumps. A 60-horse-power D. C. motor is
utilized to drive either a 10-inch single stage centrifugal
pump having a capacity of 2400 gallons per minute against
a 70-foot head, or to drive a 4-inch two stage pump having
a capacity of 525 gallons per minute against a 325-foot
head. The water from the large pump can be used to drive
a 10-inch vertical reaction turbine, while the flow from the
high pressure pump can be used to drive an 18-inch Pelton
Wheel, thus providing students with actual working demonstrations of all the ordinary types of machines. Installations include apparatus for weir, nozzle, and orifice
measurements, flow in pipes, tests and demonstrations of
Venturi, current and service meters. One section of the
laboratory is set apart for making the standard tests of
cement and sand.
The Gymnasium
This building was completed in 1929 and presented to
the University by the Alma Mater Society. It is situated
adjacent to the tennis courts and conveniently close to the
playing fields. The style of architecture and exterior finish
harmonizes well with that of the other buildings on the
campus. The playing floor has an area of 6000 square feet,
and is surrounded on three sides by tiers of benches which Location and Buildings 39
will accommodate 1400 persons. In the space behind these
seats are located the dressing rooms, drying rooms, locker
rooms and shower baths. Approximately one-third of this
space has been set aside for the exclusive use of the women
students. In addition there are four large rooms. Three
of these have been assigned to the Boxing and Wrestling
Club, the Chess Club, and the Musical Society respectively.
The fourth is a well-equipped kitchen. The main floor is
used for basketball and badminton as well as for class
exercises and games. Equipment suitable for general
gymnasium and indoor athletic work has been provided.
Forest Products Laboratory Buildings
The Forest Products Laboratories of Canada, Vancouver Laboratory, which is maintained by the Forest Service
of the Department of the Interior, Canada, occupies three
buildings provided and kept up through a co-operative
agreement between the University and the Dominion Government.
Administrative and executive offices occupy the second
floor of the main building, while the first floor is devoted
to the Timber Testing and Pathological laboratories and
the Carpenter Shop. Equipment in the Timber Testing
laboratory consists of two Olsen Universal machines of
thirty thousand pounds capacity, for testing small, clear
test pieces; one Olsen Universal machine, of two hundred
thousand pounds capacity, for tests on structural timbers,
poles, etc.; and one Hatt-Turner Impact machine. These
machines are all operated by individual direct current
motors and are furnished with all necessary accessory
testing equipment. They are adapted to the testing of
materials of construction other than timber and are at the
disposal of students in Civil Engineering and Forestry for
such tests. There are also three electric ovens, with thermostatic control, for the conditioning of test material.
The Pathological laboratory is equipped with two electric incubators with thermostatic control, an autoclave 40 The University of British Columbia
and apparatus of the latest type for the mounting and
identification of wood specimens. The laboratory maintains a reference collection of mycelial cultures of the
chief wood destroying fungi of British Columbia; also a
collection of microscopic slides of North American wood
species. These collections are being increased as opportunity offers.
The Experimental Dry Kiln building contains the most
up-to-date equipment for the scientific seasoning of lumber
and other forest products. It includes a semi-commercial
dry kiln, twenty feet in length, and a boiler and instrument room, with a covered platform extending across the
front of the building, which provides protection for the
kiln charges during loading and unloading. The kiln is
the latest design of internal fan cross-circulation type, but
is so arranged that it may be readily converted to the natural
circulation type. Its equipment includes three disc-type
fans driven by a variable speed motor, 1100 feet of heating
coils, steam traps, steam and water meters and compressed
air-operated temperature and humidity recording and control instruments. The equipment in the boiler room consists of a 10 h.p. oil-fired boiler, an air compressor, electric
ovens for small tests, kiln circulation test instruments, an
electric meter for the measurement of moisture content
of lumber, a Parr calorimeter for testing the heating value
of wood fuel, and all necessary minor apparatus.
The Air Seasoning Shed provides accommodation for
the storage of test material and for conditioning lumber
by natural means. It is provided with racks for storing
small test bolts and with a soak tank for bringing test sticks
to a saturated moisture condition.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Session
The academic year begins on the First of September and
ends on the last day of August. The Winter Session is
divided into two terms—the first, September to December; General Information 41
the second, January to May. The Summer Session consists of seven weeks' instruction in July and August, for
which preparatory reading is required except in certain
cases. For "Admission to the University" see Page 45,
and for "Registration and Attendance" see Page 47.
Courses of Study
For the Session of 1932-33 the University offers instruction in each of the three Faculties, Arts and Science,
Applied Science (including Nursing) and Agriculture, leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Commerce, Bachelor of Applied Science and Bachelor of Science
in Agriculture. In addition a course is given in the
Faculty of Arts and Science leading to a Diploma of Social
Service, and a Teacher Training Course is offered for
graduates of the Faculties of Arts and Science and Applied Science. It is also possible to proceed to a Master's
degree in each Faculty. Advanced courses of instruction
and facilities for research are offered to students who are
graduates of any University or College of recognized standing. Admission to these advanced courses, or to the privileges of research, does not in itself imply admission to
candidacy for a higher degree.
Academic Dress
The undergraduate's gown is black in colour and of the
ordinary stuff material, of ankle length, and with long
sleeves and the yoke edged with khaki cord. The graduate's gown is the same, without cord. The Bachelor's hood
is of the Cambridge pattern, black bordered with the distinctive colour of the particular Faculty; the Master's hood
is the same, lined with the distinctive colour. The colours
are, for Arts and Science, the University blue; for Applied
Science, red; for Agriculture, maize.
University Health Service
The University Campus is situated within the University
Endowment Lands, which, as unorganized territory, comes
under the direct control of the Provincial Government. 42 The University of British Columbia
Shortly after the opening of the present University Buildings in 1925, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council, by the
recommendation of the Provincial Health Officer, appointed
a Medical Health Officer for the Reserve, including the
University Campus. This Health Officer has on the Campus and in the Reserve all the powers of any Health Officer
anywhere.
In the fall of 1927, the Provincial Health Officer added
to the University Health Service a Public Health Nurse,
whose presence permits the continuous operation of a
local Health Department on the Campus and Reserve.
In addition, the Public Health Nurse is engaged by the
University for the general supervision of the individual
health of the students, first aid, etc. An office for the Public
Health Nurse is provided in the Auditorium Building and,
by the gift of the Graduating Class of 1927, has been equipped with first aid furniture and supplies.
Physical Examination.—In order to promote the physical welfare of the student body, students on entering the
University are required to report immediately to the University Health Service and obtain an appointment for
their physical examination; the examination is conducted
by, or under the direction of, the University Medical Examiner. Physical defects and weaknesses, amenable to
treatment, may thus be discovered, and the student is advised to apply to his physician for such remedial measures
as his case may require. About 10 to 15 per cent, of the
students are re-examined in their second and subsequent
years.
Rules Governing Medical Examinations.— (1) Students
must present themselves for medical examination on the
date and at the time assigned by the University Health
Service. (2) Students failing to report on the right date
or reporting on a wrong date lose their assignment. (3)
Students who do not conform to the above regulations
will be referred to the University Health Committee.
Infectious Diseases.—Students developing any illness or
suffering from any injury while on the Campus should apply General Information 43
for first aid to the Public Health Nurse. This is particularly required if the student develops any illness of an
infectious nature, including the Common Cold. Provision
is made also for the diagnosis of the infectious cases and
their safe removal to suitable quarters.
Students developing any illness or suffering any injury
while at home, boarding house, fraternity house, etc., are
required to report the same to the Public Health Nurse.
The development of any infectious disease in a University
student must be reported by the student to the University
Health Service without delay.
Students exposed to any infectious disease must immediately report to the University Health Service. Such
students may be permitted, by special order of the Medical
Health Officer, to attend the University for a prescribed
period, despite the exposure.
Such students shall report daily (or oftener, at the
discretion of the Medical Health Officer), to the Public
Health Nurse for such prescribed period. Failure to so
report will result in immediate exclusion from the University.
Students absent on account of illness must present Medical Certificates. If the absence occurs during the session,
the student must appear in person, with the certificate, at
the University Health Service immediately on return to
the University, and before attendance upon class work.
The University Health Service will examine the person
concerned and will immediately forward the certificate,
with report thereon, to the Dean of the Faculty. If the
absence occurs during the examinations, the medical certificate must be sent to the Dean of the Faculty within
two days after the termination of the examination period.
A medical certificate must show the nature and the period
of the disability. Medical report forms may be obtained
from the Dean's office. 44 The University of British Columbia
University Employment Bureau
The objects of the Employment Bureau are to provide
students with summer employment, to provide part-time
work for students during the Winter Session, and to help
students in obtaining positions after graduation. This
service is for employers seeking help and for students
desiring employment. Those who know of positions vacant
are requested to notify the Bureau. Correspondence should
be addressed to the Employment Bureau, Registrar's Office.
Dean of Women
During the session the Dean of Women may be consulted
by parents and students on matters pertaining to living conditions, vocational guidance, and other questions that
directly affect the social and intellectual life of the women
students.
Board and Residence
A list of boarding-houses, which receive men or women students, but not both, may be obtained from the
Registrar after September 1st. Men and women students
are not permitted to lodge in the same house, unless they are
members of the same family, or receive special permission
from the Senate. Women students under twenty-five
years of age are permitted to occupy suites in apartment
houses only when accompanied by some older person. Any
such arrangement must be made in consultation with the
Dean of Women. The Dean of Women also undertakes the
inspection and approval of the boarding houses listed for
women. The cost of good board and lodging is from
$35 per month upwards; of a room alone, $8 to $12 per
month. A grill is operated under the supervision of the
University, and lunch, afternoon tea and light supper may
be obtained there at very reasonable prices. Refreshments
at social functions are also supplied.
General Conduct
The University authorities do not assume responsibilities
which naturally rest with parents.   This being so, it is the Admission to the University 45
policy of the University to rely on the good sense and on
the home training of students for the preservation of good
moral standards.
ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
All inquiries relating to admission to the University
should be addressed to the Registrar.
The accommodation for students in the University is
limited. The University therefore, reserves the right to
limit the attendance
For the session 1932-33 the number of First Year students in the Faculty of Arts and Science and the Faculty of
Agriculture will be limited to 500, in the First Year of the
course in Nursing to 15, and in the Teacher Training
course to 60.
1. Except under special circumstances no student under
the age of sixteen is admitted to the University. For admission to the course in Nursing a student must be seventeen years of age, and for admission to any course in Social
Service, twenty-one years of age.
2. Candidates for admission to the courses in the First
Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science or the Faculty of
Agriculture and to the course in Nursing in Applied Science are required to pass the Junior Matriculation Examination of the Province of British Columbia or to submit
certificates showing that they have passed an equivalent
examination elsewhere. Students over 18 years of age with
full "Normal Entrance" standing, who hold Normal School
certificates, are admitted to the University as having full
Junior Matriculation standing. Special regulations are
prescribed for admission to courses in Applied Science, and
are given under the heading of "Admission" in the Applied
Science Section of the Calendar.
3. Students who have passed the Senior Matriculation
Examination are admitted to the courses of the Second
Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science. Students who
have partial  Senior Matriculation standing,  obtained in 46 The University of British Columbia
1927 or subsequently will be granted credit in First Year
Arts in each subject in which they have made 50 per cent,
or over, or in each paper in which they have made 50 per
cent, or over in so far as these papers correspond with those
of First Year Arts.
4. Certificates or diplomas showing that a candidate
has passed the Matriculation Examination of another University will be accepted in lieu of the Junior or Senior
Matriculation Examinations if the Faculty concerned considers that the examination has covered the same subjects
and required the same standard. If however, the examination covers some but not all of the necessary subjects the
candidate will be required to pass the Matriculation Examination in the subjects not covered.
5. A candidate who wishes to enter by certificates other
than a Matriculation certificate issued in British Columbia
should submit to the Registrar the original certificates.
If he wishes these returned to him, he must present also a
copy of each certificate for record at the University. He
should under no circumstances come to the University without having first obtained from the Registrar a statement
of the value of the certificates he holds, as these may lack
one or more essential subjects, or the work done in a subject may not be adequate, or, again, the percentage gained
may not be sufficiently high. Moreover, it must be remembered that a certificate may admit to one Faculty and not
to another. When an applicant's diploma or certificate does
not show the marks obtained in the several subjects of the
examination he must arrange to have a statement of his
marks sent to the Registrar by the Education Department
or University issuing such diploma or certificate. The fee
for examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must accompany the application.
6. A student of another University applying for exemption from any subject or subjects which he has already
studied is required to submit with his application a Calendar of the University in which he has previously studied,
together with a complete statement of the course he has Registration and Attendance 47
followed and a certificate of the standing gained in the
several subjects.* The Faculty concerned will determine
the standing of such a student in this University. The fee
for the examination of certificates is $2.00. This fee must
accompany the application.
7. A student who has a failure in a subject of the Junior
Matriculation examination standing against him will not
be admitted to the University.
8. The Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations
of the Province of British Columbia are conducted by the
High School and University Matriculation Board of the
Province. This Board consists of members appointed by
the Department of Education and by the University. The
requirements for Matriculation are stated in the publication, "Requirements for Matriculation," issued by the
University. The courses of study for the various grades in
the high school are given in the "Programme of Studies
for the High and Technical Schools," issued by the Department of Education.
REGISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE
Those who intend to register as students of the University are required to make application to the Registrar, on
forms to be obtained from the Registrar's office. This
application should be made in person or by mail early in
August, or as soon as the results of the Matriculation examinations are known. For First Year students in the
Faculties of Arts and Science, and Agriculture, and for
other students coming to the University for the first time,
the last day for registration is Wednesday, September 21st,
and for all other undergraduate students, Friday, September 23rd, 1932. (See regulations in reference to "Admission to the University," page 45.)
1. There are four classes of students:—
(a)  Graduate   students—Students  who  are   pursuing
courses of study in a Faculty in which they hold
•For the conditions under which  exemption is granted  in the Faculty of Arts
and Science, see "Courses Leading to the Degree of B.A." 48 The University of British Columbia
a degree, whether they are proceeding to a Master's
degree or not.
(b) Full undergraduates—Students proceeding to a
degree in any Faculty who have passed all the
examinations precedent to the year in which they
are registered.
(c) Conditioned undergraduates—Students proceeding
to a degree with defects in their standing which
do not prevent their entering a higher year under
the regulations governing "Examination and Advancement" of the Faculty in which they are registered.
(d) Partial students—Students not belonging to one of
the three preceding classes.    (See 7, below.)
2. All students other than graduate students are required to register at the office of the Registrar on or before
the last day for registration, to furnish the information
necessary for the University records, to enrol for the particular classes which they wish to attend, and to sign the
following declaration:
"I hereby accept and submit myself to the statutes,
rules, regulations, and ordinances of The University of
British Columbia, and of the Faculty or Faculties in which
I am registered, and to any amendments thereto which
may be made while I am a student of the University, and I
promise to observe the same."
In the information furnished for the University records, students are requested to state what churches they
propose to make their place of worship. This information
is available for any of the city churches desiring it.
3. A late registration fee of $2.00 will be charged all
students who register after the above dates and up to and
including the day when lectures begin—Wednesday, September 28th.
In"addition to the $2.00 for late registration a fine of
$1.00 a day ($6.00 a week) for a period of two weeks will
be imposed upon all students who register after the day
when lectures begin, the maximum fine being $14.00. Registration and Attendance 49
No registration after Wednesday, October 12th (two
weeks beyond the day when lectures begin) will be accepted
without the special permission of the Faculty concerned.
A candidate so accepted for registration will have to pay
the maximum fine of $14.00 and may be required to take
fewer courses than the regular year's work: provided that
if the student is required (on account of late registration)
to take less than fifteen units the fine may be reduced or
waived by the Faculty concerned.
4. Students registering for the first time must present
the certificates which constitute their qualification for admission to the course of study for which they wish to
register. The Registrar is empowered to register all duly
qualified students. Doubtful cases will be dealt with by the
Faculty concerned.
5. Students doing work in two academic years will
register in the lower year and fill out their course cards in
such a way as to make clear which courses are required to
complete the lower year.
6. Students desiring to make a change in the course
for which they have registered must apply to the Registrar
on the proper form for a "change of course." Except m
special circumstance, no change will be allowed after the
fifteenth day of the session. If the application is approved
by the Faculty concerned, the Registrar will give the necessary notifications.
7. Partial students, who are not proceeding to a degree,
are not normally required to pass an examination for admission, but before registering they must produce a certificate showing that they have satisfied the Dean and the
Heads of the Departments concerned that they are qualified
to pursue with advantage the course of study which they
propose to undertake.
8. Students are required to attend at least seven-eighths
of the lectures in each course that they take. Lectures will
commence on the hour, and admission to a lecture or laboratory and credit for attendance may be refused by the 50 The University of British Columbia
Instructor for lateness, misconduct, inattention or neglect
of duty. Absence consequent on illness or domestic affliction may be excused only by the Dean of the Faculty
concerned, and medical certificates or other evidence must
be presented. If the absence occurs during the session,
the student must appear in person, with the certificate, at
the University Health Service immediately on return to
the University, and before attendance upon class work.
The University Health Service will examine the person
concerned and will immediately forward the certificate,
with report thereon, to the Dean of the Faculty. // the
absence occurs during the examinations, the certificate
must be sent to the Dean of the Faculty within two days
after the termination of the examination period. A medical certificate must show the nature and the period of the
disability. Medical report forms may be obtained from
the Dean's office. In cases of deficient attendance students
may (with the sanction of the Dean and the Head of the
Department concerned) be excluded from the Christmas or
the final examination in a course; but, in the case of a final
examination, unless the unexcused absences exceed one-
fourth of the total number of lectures in a course, such
students may be permitted to sit for supplemental examination. (See regulations in each Faculty in reference to
"Examinations and Advancement.")
9. All candidates for a degree must make formal application for graduation at least one month previous to
the Congregation at which they expect to obtain the degree. Special forms for this purpose may be obtained
from the Registrar's office.
FEES
All cheques must be certified and made payable to "The
University of British Columbia."
The sessional fees are as follows: Fees 51
For Full and Conditioned Undergraduates
In Arts and Science—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th-$65.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd 60.00
 $125.00
In Social Service Course—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th.$65.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd 60.00
 $125.00
In Teacher Training Course—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th._$40.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd 35.00
 $ 75.00
In Applied Science—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $90.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd 85.00
 $175.00
In Nursing and Public Health—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $65.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd 60.00
 $125.00
NOTE:—For Third and Fourth Year students in Nursing the Sessional fee is
(1.00, payable with the Alma Mater fee of $10.00, on or before October 10th.
Students admitted to Nursing B or C and proceeding to the Certificate on a basis
of part-time attendance over two or more years, will pay the regular fee for the
whole course, but the amount payable each year will be pro-rated to correspond with
the proportion of work taken in that year.
In Agriculture—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $65.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd 60.00
 $125.00
Occupational Course—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th_$25.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd 25.00
 $ 50.00
For Partial Students
Fees, per "Unit"— $ 12.50
First half payable on or before Oct. 10th.
Balance payable on or before Jan. 23rd. 52 The University of British Columbia
For Students in Saturday Morning, Late Afternoon
and Evening Classes
Fees, per 3-Unit Course— $ 30.00
First half payable on or before Oct. 10th.
Balance payable on or before Jan. 23rd.
For Graduates
Registration and Class Fees—Payable on or before Oct.
10th—
First Registration    $ 30.00
Each subsequent Session      5.00
Alma Mater Fee
For all undergraduates other than students in Saturday
Morning, Late Afternoon and Evening Classes
Payable on or before Oct. 10th $10.00
Caution Money
For all students—
Payable on or before Oct. 10th $5.00
Late Registration
See page 49 $2.00 to $14.00
After the dates given above an additional fee of $2.00
will be exacted of all students in default.
The Alma Mater Fee is a fee exacted from all students
for the support of the Alma Mater Society. It was authorized by the Board of Governors at the request of the students themselves.
The Caution Money is a deposit from which deductions will be made to cover breakages, wasteage, and use of
special materials in laboratories, etc. If the balance to the
credit of a student falls below $1.50, a further deposit of
$5.00 may be required. Caution money will be refunded on
and after the 31st day of April. Any caution money unclaimed by the llth day of May will be turned over to the
Alma Mater Society.
Immediately after October 10th and January 23rd, the Fees 53
Bursar will notify students who have not paid their fees
that steps will be taken to ensure their exclusion from
classes while the fees remain unpaid, and will send to Members of Faculty a list of the students who have not paid their
fees. Such students will be excluded from classes and will
not be readmitted except on presentation of a special certificate signed by the Bursar, certifying that the required fees
have been paid. The Bursar will see that these regulations
are carried out.
Students registering after October 10th shall pay their
fees at the time of registration, failing which they become
subject to the provisions of the preceding Regulation.
Students borrowing books from the University Library
for Preparatory Reading courses, will be required to make
the usual deposit of two dollars ($2.00), with the Librarian
to cover mailing cost.
For Summer Session Students
Fees are payable on registration, otherwise an additional
fee of $2.00 will be exacted.
Minimum fee  $25.00
Per "Unit"  10.00
Caution Money      5.00
Summer Session Association      2.00
Special Fees
Regular supplemental examination,
per   paper  $ 5.00
Special examination, per paper      7.50
Re-reading, per paper     2.00
Graduation   15.00
Supplemental examination fees must be paid two weeks
before the examination, and special examination fees and
fees for re-reading when application is made.
Graduation fees must be paid two weeks before Congregation. (See regulation in reference to application for
a degree, page 50.)
If fees are not paid when due an additional fee of $2.00
will be charged. 54 The University of British Columbia
MEDALS,   SCHOLARSHIPS,   PRIZES,
BURSARIES  AND  LOANS
FOR  1932-33
GENERAL  REGULATIONS
1. For scholarships, prizes and bursaries which are
not based solely on academic standing, intending candidates must make application to the Registrar on forms
provided for the purpose. These applications must reach
the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations, unless other instructions are given in the Calendar notice.
2. All awards of medals, scholarships, prizes and bursaries are made by Senate, unless otherwise provided for
by special resolution of Senate.
3. Scholarships, medals, and prizes will be awarded at
the close of the session, and, in case of Matriculation Examinations, after the June examination.
4. If the award of a medal, scholarship, or prize is
based on an examination, no award will be made to a candidate who obtains less than 75 per cent, of the possible
marks.
5. Candidates are not permitted to hold more than
one scholarship each, although they may win more and
will be given credit in the published lists if they do. Scholarships thus won but not held will pass to candidates next in
order of merit, provided they have made the required marks.
6. Scholarships under the jurisdiction of the University are paid in two instalments—on the 10th of October
and the 23rd of January. Normally this is during the
session following their award, and undergraduate winners
must continue their courses to the satisfaction of the Facul- Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 55
ty concerned. But Faculty may permit a scholarship to be
reserved a year, provided the student shows satisfactory
reasons for postponing attendance.
7. Winners of scholarships who desire to do so may
resign the monetary value, while the appearance of their
names in the University list enables them to retain the
honour. Any funds thus made available will be used for
additional scholarships or student loans.
8. Medals, scholarships, prizes, bursaries and loans are
open to winter session students only, unless otherwise
stated, and marks obtained in summer session courses are
not taken into account in awarding them.
9. The Senate of the University of British Columbia
reserves the right so to change the terms under which any
exhibition, scholarship or prize may be established at the
University of British Columbia that the terms may better
meet new conditions as they arise and may more fully
carry out the intentions of the donor and maintain the usefulness of the benefaction. The right so reserved shall be
exercised by a resolution of the Senate duly confirmed by
the Board of Governors provided always that a year's
notice shall be given in Senate of any proposed change and
that the donor or his representatives if living shall be consulted about the proposed change.
MEDALS
The Governor-General's Gold Medal
A gold medal, presented by His Excellency the Governor-General of Canada, will be awarded to the student standing at the head of the graduating class in the Faculty of
Arts and Science. Honour and pass students may compete
for this medal.
The French Government Medal
A bronze medal, offered by the French Consul for
Western Canada on behalf of the French Government,
will be awarded to a student of the French language on the 56 The University of British Columbia
recommendation of the Head of the Department of Modern
Languages.
The Kiwanis Club Gold Medal
A gold medal, donated by the Kiwanis Club of Vancouver, will be awarded to the student making the highest
standing in the final year in Commerce.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR POST-GRADUATE STUDIES
University Scholarship
A scholarship of $200 may be awarded to a graduate
student who shows special aptitude for post-graduate
studies.
The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, given by the Faculty Women's
Club of the University, is open to graduates of this University who intend in the following year to pursue postgraduate study in this or any other approved university.
The French Government Scholarship
A scholarship of 10,000 francs is donated by the French
Government for one year's post-graduate study in France.
It is tenable for one year and is contingent upon the voting of the credits for the year by the French Chambers.
As this contingency applies to every item of the French
budget the scholarship may be considered as permanent.
The award is made by the -French Consul for Western
Canada, residing in Vancouver, on the recommendation of
the Head of the Department of French in the University.
The Brock Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, donated by Dean R. W. Brock,
may be awarded to a graduate student in Applied Science
who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 57
The Exhibition of 1851 Scholarship
Under the revised conditions for the award of the Exhibition of 1851 Scholarship in Science, The University
of British Columbia is included in the list of universities
from which nominations for scholarships allotted to Canada
may be made. These scholarships of £250 per annum, are
tenable, ordinarily, for two years. They are granted only
to British subjects under 26 years of age, who have been
bona fide students of pure or applied science ef not less
than three years' standing.
SCHOLARSHIPS   FOR   UNDERGRADUATES
1.     IN ALL FACULTIES
The Rhodes Scholarship
A Rhodes Scholarship is tenable at the University of
Oxford and may be held for three years. Since, however,
the majority of Rhodes Scholars obtain standing which
enables them to take a degree in two years, appointments
are made for two years in the first instance, and a Rhodes
Scholar who may wish to remain for a third year will be
expected to present a definite plan of study for that period
satisfactory to his College and to the Rhodes Trustees.
Rhodes Scholars may be allowed, if the conditions are
approved by their own College and by the Oxford Secretary to the Rhodes Trustees, either to postpone their third
year, returning to Oxford for it after a period of work in
their own countries, or may spend their third year in postgraduate work at any University of Great Britain, and in
special cases at any University on the continent of Europe,
the overseas Dominions, or in the United States, but not
in the country of their origin.
The stipend of a Rhodes Scholarship is fixed at £400
per year. At most colleges, and for most men, this sum
is not sufficient to meet a Rhodes Scholar's necessary expenses   for   Term-time and Vacations, and Scholars who 58 The University of British Columbia
can afford to supplement it by say £50 per year from their
own resources will find it advantageous to do so.
A candidate to be eligible must:
1. Be a British subject, with at least five years' domicile in Canada and unmarried. He must have
passed his nineteenth, but not have passed his
twenty-fifth birthday on October 1st of the year
for which he is elected.
2. Have reached such a stage in his course at one of the
Universities of Canada that he will have completed
at least two years at the University in question by
October 1st of the year for which he is elected.
Candidates may apply either for the Province in which
they have their ordinary private domicile, home, or residence, or for any Province in which they have received
at least two years of their college education before applying.
In that section of the Will in which he defined the
general type of scholar he desired, Mr. Rhodes wrote as
follows:
"My desire being that the students who shall be elected
to the Scholarships shall not be merely bookworms, I direct
that in the election of a student to a Scholarship regard
shall be had to:
1.. His literary and scholastic attainments.
2. His fondness for and success in manly outdoor sports
such as cricket, football and the like.
3. His qualities of manhood, truth, courage, devotion
to duty, sympathy for and protection of the weak,
kindliness, unselfishness and fellowship, and
4. His exhibition during school days of moral force of
character and of instincts to lead and to take an interest in his schoolmates, for those latter attributes
will be likely in after life to guide him to esteem
the performance of public duty his highest aim." Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 59
Full particulars can be obtained from Sherwood Lett,
Esq., 626 Pender Street West, Vancouver, B.C., Secretary
of the Selection Committee for the Province of British
Columbia.
Each candidate for a Scholarship is required to make
application to the Secretary of the Committee of Selection
of the province in which he wishes to compete not later
than November 10th. Application forms may be obtained
from the Registrar's office or from the Secretary of the
Selection Committee.
University Scholarships
Two scholarships of $150 each may be awarded, on the
basis of the work of the First Year, to returned soldiers,
their dependents and the children of deceased soldiers
proceeding to the work of the Second Year.
2.   IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
University Scholarships
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will
be awarded to students proceeding to the Fourth Year, the
award to be based on the work of the Third Year.
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will
be awarded to students proceeding to the Third Year, the
award to be based on the work of the Second Year.
The Shaw Memorial Scholarship*
This scholarship of $125, founded by friends of the late
James Curtis Shaw, Principal of Vancouver College, and
afterwards of McGill University College, Vancouver, will
be awarded upon the results of the examination of the
Second Year in Arts and Science to the undergraduate
student standing highest in any two of three courses, English 2, Latin 2, Greek (1 or 2), and proceeding to the work
of the Third Year.
♦Originally donated to the Royal Institution (See Page 15), this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British
Columbia. 60 The University of British Columbia
The McGill Graduates' Scholarship*
A scholarship of $125, founded by the McGill Graduates' Society of British Columbia, will be awarded to the
undergraduate student standing highest in English and
French of the Second year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the work of the Third Year.
The Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, founded by the members of
the Terminal City Club as a memorial to those members
of the Club who lost their lives in the Great War, will be
awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in
English and Economics of the Second Year in Arts and
Science and proceeding to the work of the Third Year.
The Imperial Order Daughters of the Empire
Scott Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $100—the proceeds of an endowment of $2,000—founded by the Imperial Order of the
Daughters of the Empire of the City of Vancouver, in memory of Captain Robert Falcon Scott, the Antarctic explorer,
who sacrificed his life in the cause of Science, will be
awarded for general proficiency in biological subjects to
the student who has completed his Second Year in Arts and
Science, and who is proceeding in the Third Year to Honour
work either in Biology or in a course including Biology.
Royal Institution Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to the student
taking first place in the examinations of the First Year in
Arts and Science.
University Scholarships
Two scholarships of $150 each will be awarded on the
examinations of the First Year in Arts and Science, one to
the student taking second place and the other to the student
taking third place in general proficiency.
•Originally donated to the Royal Institution (See Page 15), this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British
Columbia. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 61
The P.E.O. Sisterhood Scholarship
A scholarship of $75, given by Vancouver Chapters of
the P.E.O. Sisterhood, will be awarded to the woman student standing highest in English in the First Year of the
Faculty of Arts and Science.
The Beverley Cayley Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, given by His Honour Judge
Cayley and Mrs. Cayley in memory of their son, Beverley
Cayley, Arts '18, will be awarded to the male student standing highest in English in the First Year of the Faculty of
Arts and Science.
The I. J. Klein Scholarship
This annual scholarship of $100 has been donated by
I. J. Klein, Esq., Vancouver, B.C., for ten years, beginning
in May, 1930, and will be awarded to the student obtaining first place in the examination of the Third Year of the
Course in Commerce.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scho'arship
A scholarship of $100, the proceeds of a fund created by
the Vancouver Women's Canadian Club, will be awarded
to the student of the Second Year obtaining first place in
the subject, Canadian History.
3.    IN APPLIED   SCIENCE
University Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency in previous work in this University, to a student
proceeding to the Third Year of the Course in Nursing and
Health and having successfully completed the hospital
probationary period. Applications shall be made to the
Registrar not later than September 1st.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $100 is offered by the Club to be
awarded to the student who attains the highest standing in 62 The University of British Columbia
the first four years' training, academic and practical, of the
Nursing and Health course.
The Dunsmuir Scholarship*
A scholarship of $150, founded by the Hon. James
Dunsmuir, will be awarded to the undergraduate student
standing highest in the Mining Engineering Course of the
Fourth Year in Applied Science and proceeding to the work
of the Fifth Year.
University Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to a student
proceeding to the Fourth Year in Applied Science, the
award to be based on the work of the Third Year.
Royal Institution Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency in the work of the Second Year in Applied Science.
4.   IN AGRICULTURE
University Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $150 will be awarded to
a student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be
based on the work of the First Year.
The David Thom Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $100 will be awarded to
a student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be
based on the work of the First Year.
MATRICULATION   SCHOLARSHIPS
University Scholarship
One scholarship of $150 will be awarded upon the results
of the Senior Matriculation Examination.
•Originally donated to the Royal Institution (See Page 15) this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British
Columbia. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 63
Royal Institution Scholarships
Seven General Proficiency scholarships will be awarded
on the result of the Junior Matriculation examinations:
(a) $150 to the candidate of highest standing in the Province, and (b) $100 to the candidate of next highest standing in each of the following districts: (1) Victoria District, (2) Vancouver Island (exclusive of Victoria District)
and Northern Mainland, (3) Vancouver Central District
(comprising the former limits of the City of Vancouver),
(4) The Lower Mainland (exclusive of Vancouver Central
District but including Agassiz), (5) Yale, (6) Kootenays.
These scholarships will be paid only to students in attendance at The University of British Columbia. Under
certain conditions they may be reserved for limited periods.
A winner who is completing Senior Matriculation in a high
school of the same district may have the scholarship reserved for one year, subject to obtaining satisfactory
standing in the Senior Matriculation examination. Also a
winner who completes the first two years of the Arts course
in an affiliated institution may have the scholarship reserved for two years. Sums accruing from unpaid scholarships may be used in the form of bursaries or loans.
PRIZES
1.    IN ALL FACULTIES
The University Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, open to all students
of the University, will be awarded for an essay on a special
literary subject, to be announced at the beginning of the
Session by the Department of English.
The Players' Club Prize
A prize of $50, donated by the Players' Club, is offered
for an original play suitable for the Club's Christmas performance. The award will be made on the recommendation of the Faculty members of the Advisory Board of the
Players' Club. 64 The University of British Columbia
The Isabel Ecclestone Mackay Prize
A prize of $25 from the estate of the late Mrs. Isabel
Ecclestone Mackay will be awarded to the student of the
University who submits an original poem in the English
language which shall be deemed of sufficient merit, the
award to be made upon the recommendation of the Head
of the Department of English. The poem submitted may
have been published or may be published subsequently by
the writer.
Poems entered for this competition must be in the hands
of the Registrar not later than the last day of the final
examinations.
2.   IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
The Vancouver Women's Conservative Association Prize
This prize of $25, given by the Vancouver Women's
Conservative Association, is open to students taking the
Mathematics of the First Year in the Faculty of Arts and
Science. In awarding it preference will be given to the
son or daughter of a soldier, provided satisfactory standing is secured in the subject.
The French Government Book Prize
A book prize, offered by the French Consul for Western
Canada on behalf of the French Government, willl be
awarded to a student of the French language on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Modern
Languages.
3.    IN   APPLIED   SCIENCE
The Convocation Prize
A prize of $50, donated by Convocation of The University of British Columbia, will be awarded to the student
in the Fifth Year of Applied Science whose record, in the
opinion of the Faculty, is the most outstanding. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 65
The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, donated by the Vancouver Branch of the Engineering Institute of Canada in
memory of the late Walter Moberly, will be awarded for
the best engineering thesis submitted by any Fifth Year
student in the Faculty of Applied Science.
The Engineering Profession's Prizes
Five book prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered
by the Engineering Profession in British Columbia (Association of Professional Engineers) for competition by those
students in the Fourth Year of the Faculty of Applied
Science who are registered as engineering pupils according to the by-laws of the Association.
The prizes are awarded for the best summer essays in
any five branches of engineering, to be selected and specified by the Faculty.
The five successful essays may be made available by
the Faculty to the Council of the Engineering Profession
and, through the Council, may be referred to or quoted in
the literature of the Profession.
The Provincial Board of Health Prizes
The Provincial Board of Health of the Province of
British Columbia offers the sum of $100 in prizes for competition in the Course in Public Health Nursing.
The Engineering Institute of Canada Prize
The Engineering Institute of Canada offers an annual
prize of $25 for five years to each of eleven Canadian Universities of which the University of British Columbia is
one.   The first award will be made in May, 1931.
The prize will be awarded to a student of the Fourth
Year in Applied Science on the basis of the marks made in
his academic work in that year. His activities in the students' engineering organization or in the local branch of a
recognized engineering society will also be considered. 66 The University of British Columbia
BURSARIES
The Captain LeRoy Memorial Bursary
This bursary of the annual value of $250 was donated
by the Universities Service Club in memory of their comrades who fell in the Great War. It is named after Captain 0. E. LeRoy, who commanded the overseas contingent
from this University and who was killed at Passchendaele
in 1917.
It will be awarded to a student, or students, requiring
financial assistance to enable him, or them, to attend the
University. For this purpose it may be awarded to a
matriculant, to a student of any year or to a graduate student of the University proceeding to post-graduate work in
this or any approved university. In making the award preference will be given first to returned soldiers, then to the
dependents of soldiers and finally to suitable candidates from
the student body at large.
Application must contain a statement of the academic
record and special circumstances of the applicant with
two supporting references and, in the case of the preferred
categories, of the war record of the soldier.
The award will be made by the Senate upon the recommendation of the Faculties acting in consultation with the
Executive or accredited representatives of the Universities Service Club.
The Khaki University and Young Men's Christian
Association Memorial Fund Bursaries
A sum of money given to the University by the administrators of the Khaki University of Canada provides a
fund from which are awarded annually ten bursaries of
the value of $100 each, known as the Khaki University
and Young Men's Christian Association Memorial Bursaries.
Under conditions imposed by the donors these bursaries
may be used for undergraduate purposes only and in making the awards a preference is given to the sons and Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 67
daughters of the soldiers of the Great War. The financial
necessities of candidates are also taken into account.
These bursaries are awarded on the results of examinations in all years but the final, in all faculties (1), to those
dependents of soldiers who have the requisite academic
standing, (2) failing such, to the student body at large.
To be eligible for an award a soldier's dependent must obtain at least second class standing, i.e. 65 per cent.; for
all others 75 per cent, is required.
Dependents of soldiers and others who have expectations of attaining standing as stated above and who are
in need of financial assistance should apply to the Registrar on the special form provided not later than the last
day of the final examinations.
These bursaries are open to students from Victoria
College proceeding to a course of study in this University.
The American Women's Club Bursary
Through the generosity of the American Women's Club
of Vancouver a sum of $110 will be available for 1932-33
to assist a student who has satisfactorily completed the
First Year in Arts and Science, and who could not otherwise continue the course in the Second Year. Application
must be made to the Registrar not later than September 1st.
David Thom Bursaries
From the funds of the David Thom Estate a sum of
$160 is available annually for the following bursaries:
1. A sum of $100 to be awarded to the junior matriculant
with the highest matriculation standing registering in
the First Year of Agriculture.
2. A sum of $60 to be awarded to a student who has
satisfactorily completed the work of the First Year in
Agriculture and is proceeding to the work of the Second
Year.
The Isaac Bunting Bursary
A bursary of $75 was donated by Isaac Bunting, Esq.,
and awarded in May, 1932, to a student of the Third
Year   taking   the highest standing in Botanical subjects 68 The University of British Columbia
and proceeding to honour or major work in Botany of the
Fourth Year in any Faculty.
LOANS
Limited funds are provided from which loans, not to
exceed $100.00 may be made to undergraduate students
who have completed satisfactorily one year's University
work and who can show they are in need of pecuniary
assistance. Loans must be secured by approved joint
promissory note given for a definite term and signed by
the applicant and his parent or guardian. Loans are not
granted to graduate students nor to students taking the
Teacher Training Course. Applications for loans should
be addressed to the Bursar of the University.
General Loan Fund
The General Loan Fund is maintained by annual grants
made by the Board of Governors.
The Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy
B. C. Division Fund
This is a cumulative fund of $50 per year, given by the
Institute to the University as a trust, to be used for loans
to students taking the mining course. Applicants for
loans must be recommended by the Departments of Geology, Mining and Metallurgy.
The David Thom Fund
From the David Thom Estate funds a sum of $500 has
been set aside for loans to Third and Fourth Year students
in Agriculture. A loan from this fund will supplement one
from the existing University loan funds.
POST-GRADUATE AWARDS AND APPOINTMENTS
The University is in possession of a great deal of information regarding post-graduate scholarships, fellowships and assistantships in other Universities, or as given
by various research bodies. Places are available in practically all departments of University work. Students wishing to pursue post-graduate work outside this University
are advised to consult the Registrar for information. THE
FACULTY
OF
ARTS AND SCIENCE TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF ARTS
KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Ag
MORNINGS
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
Ap 101
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 300
Ap 204
A 103
106, 203
A 100
A 101
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 207
A 205
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100
S 200
Ap 101
Botany 4 	
Ap ioi
S 300
A 201
Ap 204
A 100
J 06, 205,
A 101,
104, 105,
204
Ap 102
A 108
A 206
A 207
A 103
A 102
A 208
S 200
Ap 101
Ap 101
Biology 3	
Ap 101
Botany 6 e 	
Ap 101
Economics 6	
S 300
Ap 204
English 1
Sees. 1, 2, 3	
English 1,
Sees. 4, 5, 6 	
English 13 	
A 103
Sees. 4, 5, 6 	
106, 203
French 2,
Sees, e, f, g, h	
Geology 5 and 12	
German 1, Sec. a	
A 100
9
French 2
French 2,
Sees, a, b, o, d,
A 101
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
Greek A  	
A 102
History 12 	
Latin 7	
A 207
Latin 2 a, Sec. 1	
A 205
Mathematics 3	
Mathematics 17.	
Philosophy 1 af Sec. 1
Mathematics 3	
Mathematics 10	
Mathematics 17 ._
Philosophy 1 a. Sec 1
Physics 1	
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100
S 200
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 417
S 400
A   201
A 102
Ap 202
A 100
A 104
A 105
Ap 100
A 101
A 106
108, 203
205
A 208
A 103
S 210
Botany 3 _ .T
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 417
A 100
r A 103
Ap 202
A 207
A 104
Ap 102
A 203
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 201
A 105,
106, 205,
A 204
Botany 5 b     .      	
Botany 6, b and d..~
Chemistry 3	
Ap 101
Chemistry 9	
S 417
Economics 1, Sec. 1 ..
Economics 9 	
Economics 1, Sec. 3..
Economics 4.	
Economics 1, Sec. 1 ..
S 400
A 201
A 102
English 10	
Ap 202
10
French 4 a.	
English 9	
A 100
Geology 2	
French 3 b 	
A 104
French 4 b. 	
A 105
Geology l._	
Geology 7	
Ap 100
Greek 2..  	
Ap 106
Mathematics 1,
History 14	
History 20      	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4	
A 101
Latin 2 b	
A 106,
Philosophy 1 a, Sec. 9
Philosophy 8, Sec. 2
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 5, 6, 7 	
108, 203,
Philosophy 1 a, Sec 2
Philosophy 8, Sec. 2
Physics 3  	
205
A 208
A 103
S 210
Agricultural
Ag 104
Ap 100
8 417
S 400
S 200
Ap 202
A  101
A 105,106
108, 206
A 104
Ap 102
A 20;
A 203
A 204
A 102
S 210
Ap 101
Ap 101
Ap 235
S 300
S 417
Ap 100
A 206
S 200
A 104,
105, 108,
203
A 100, 204
Ap 102
A 201
A 103,
A 207
A 101
A 205
Ap 101
Agricultural
Botany 6 b	
Ag 104
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2....
Chemistry 4	
Ap 100
Economics 1, Sec. 2 ..
Economics 1, Sec. 4 ..
S 417
Economics 1, Sec. 2 ..
S 400
English 19	
S 200
English 14	
French 1,
Sees, a, b, o, d	
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h	
French 3 a	
Ap 202
A 101
French 1,
Sees, a, b, o, d	
French 4 e. 	
Geology 8	
A 105,
106, 108
11
Geology 6	
206
German, Beg., Sec. a..
A 104
Latin 1 	
Ap 102
Mathemat'cs 2 	
German, Beg. Sec a..
History 11	
Mathematics 2	
A 205
A 203
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1
Zoology 4	
A 204
A 102
S 210
Ap 101
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR — 193^-33
AND SCIENCE
riculture; Ap, Applied Science; S, Science.
MORNINGS
Thursday
Room
Friday
Room
Saturday
Room
Botany 6 f	
Ap 101
Ap 101
	
S 300
A 201
Ap 204
A 100
106, 205,
A 101,
104, 105,
204
Ap 102
A 108
A 206
A 207
A 103
A 102
A 208
S 200
Ap 101
Ap 101
Chemistry 9 Lab	
Commercial Law 1	
A 201
S 300
A 201
Ap 204
A 100
106, 205,
A 101,
104, 105,
204
S 300
Ap 204
A 103
106, 203
A 100
A 101
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 207
A 205
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100 a
S 200
Seos. 1, 2, 3 	
English 1,
English 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3	
English 13	
Geology 5 and 12	
German 1, Sec. a.	
French 2,
Sees, a, b, c, d..
French 2,
Sees, e, f, g, h..„	
9
German 1, Sec. a	
A 108
A 206
A 207
A 103
A 102
A 208
S 200
History 12 	
Latin 2 a. Sec. 1  . ...
Mathematics 10.—
Mathematics 17	
Philosophy 1 b. Sec 1
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 417
A 100
A 103
Ap 202
A 207
A 104
Ap 102
A 203
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 201
A 105
106, 205,
A 204
Ap 101
S 300
Chemistry 9 Lab	
Economics 1, Sec. 1...
S 400
A 201
A 102 1
Ap 202
A 100
A 104
A 105
Ap 106
A 101
FA 106,
108, 203,
205
A 208
A 103
Economics 1, Sec 3 ..
A 100
A 103
Ap 202
A 207
A 104
Education	
English 10 	
English 10 	
French 3 b    	
German 1, Sec. b	
A 203
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 201
A 105,
106. 205,
A 204
10
History 20       	
Greek 2 _	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4	
Philosophy 1 b, Sec 2
Philosophy 8, Sec 2
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 5, 6, 7 	
Sees. 5, 6, 7.	
Ap 101
S 300
S 417
Ap 100
A 206
S 200
A 104,
105, 108,
203
A 100, 204
Ap 102
A 201
A 103
A 207
A 101
A 205
Ap 101
Agricultural
Econoirics 	
Economics 1, Sec. 2	
Ag 104
S 400
S 200
Ap 202
A 101
A105, 106
108, 206
A 104
Ap 102
A 205
A 203
A 204
A 102
S 210
Ap 101
Ap 101
Chemistry 1, Sec 2....
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2....
Chemistry 9 Lab—	
Economics 1, Sec 4 ..
English 19	
S 300
Ap 100
A 206
S 200
A 104,
105. 108,
203
A100, 204
English 19	
English 14       	
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h,	
French 1,
Sees, a, b, c, d	
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h	
German, Beg  Sec.  a..
A 201
A 103
A 207
A 205
A 101
Latin 1     	
11
Latin 2 a, Sec. 2	
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE AFTERNOONS
TIME TABLE
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
Botany 3 Lab. 	
Botany 5 a and c
Botany 5 c Lab—	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1	
Chemistry 1, Lab.,
S 300
Chemistry 1, See. 1	
S 300
A 103
A 103
A 103
A 100,
Ap 100,
A 104,
105
A 204
A 106
A 207
A 201
A 205
A 101
A 100,
Ap 106
A 106,
108, 203,
205
French 1,
Ap 100
French 1,
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4	
A 104,
105
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 1
A 204
1
Geology 7 Lab	
Ap lOfi
History 10	
A 106
A 207
A 201
A 205
A 101
Botany 3 Lab	
Botany 5 a and c   ....
Botany 6c Lab.._	
Botany 3 Lab	
Botany 5 c Lab	
Biology J,  Sec. 1	
A 106
A106
A 206
A 203
Ap 100
A 205
A 201
A 100
A 108
A 101
S 210
English 16
A 206
English 16	
Chemistry 4 Lab _^
A 203
Ap 202
A 100,
106, 205,
Ap 106
English 1,
Sees. 1, 2, 3 -IP
Ap 100
German, Beg. Sec. c.
German, Beg. Sec. c
A 205
A 201
Ap 106
A 203
A 100
History 13	
Latin 8 B	
History 13  	
A 108
t,
History 19	
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 1
A 101
s 2in
A 103
A 103
	
Biology 1, Sec.  1	
A 103
Botany 1 Lab J
Chemistry 1 Lab.,    "
Sees, a, b._	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a.„.
Chemistry 7 Lab..„	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b._.
Chemistry 4 Lab..	
A 103
3
A 103
Ap 102
Physics 3 Lab. Sec. 1
A 102
Botany 1 Lab 	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, a, b	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a.._
Biology 1, Sec. 2
Botany 2 Lab	
Chemistry 2 Lab b
Chemistry 4 Lab	
4
Zoology 6 Lab 	
S 400
Botany 2 Lab 	
Botany 4 Lab.._	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b	
5
Chemistry 1  Lab.,
Chemistry 2 Lab. a....
CONSULT DEPARTMENT HEADS FOR -Continued
AFTERNOONS
Thursday
Bacteriology 1 and 2.
Biology 1, Sec. 3	
Botany 4 	
Botany 6 c and e Lab,
Chemistry 3 Lab	
Education	
Geology 1 Lab	
Geology 9. 	
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 5, 6, 7.__	
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 2
Zoology 1 Lab	
Bacteriology 1 and 2.
Biology 1, Sec. 3	
Botany 4 	
Botany 6 c and e Lab,
Chemistry 3 Lab. b	
Education .■.	
English 1,
Sees. 4, 5, 6,	
English 2 c _	
Geology 1 Lab	
Geology 9	
Latin S A	
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 2
Zoology 1 Lab	
Biology 1, Sec. 4	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
A 103
Physics 3 Lab,, Sec. 2
Biology 1, Sec. 4.	
Botany 7 Lab 	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b....
Chemistry 3 Lab. b._
Zoology 1 Lab	
Chemistry 2 Lab. b~
Room
A 103
Ap"li'2
A 105,
106, 205,
Ap 202
A 103
106, 203,
A 106
A 203
Friday
Bacteriology 5	
Biology 1, Sec. 5	
Biology 3	
Botany 6 d Lab	
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1
Chemistry 3 Lab. a
Education	
English 2 a	
French 1,
Sees, i, j	
French 4 e	
Geology 2 Lab	
History 10	
Latin 3 ,
Philosophy 7 	
Philosophy 9	
Sociology 3 	
Zoology 4 Lab	
Bacteriology 5	
Biology 2, Sec. 5...
Biology 3	
Botany 6 d Lab...
Chemistry 3 Lab.
Chemistry 4 Lab.—.
Education	
English 16	
French 4 c	
Geography 1	
Geology 2 Lab	
Geology 8.	
German, Beg. Sec.
German 2	
History 1	
History 13	
History 19	
Philosophy 1 c	
Sociology 1„	
Zoology 4 Lab	
Bacteriology 5	
Biology 1, Sec. 6	
Biology 3	
Botany 6 d Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab.,
Sees, d, e	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a..
Chemistry 3 Lab. a..
Chemistry 4 Lab	
Education	
Zoology 4 Lab	
Bacteriology 5	
Biology 1, Sec. 6	
Biology 3	
Botany 6 d Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab	
Sees, d, e	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a..
Chemistry 3 Lab. a.,
Chemistry 4 Lab	
Zoology 4 Lab	
Chemistry 1 Lab	
Sees, d, e ._	
Chemistry 2 Lab. a..
Room
S 300
A
103
A
100,
Ap
100
A
104
105
A
204
A
106
A 207
A
201
A 205
A
101
A 106
A 206
A 203
Ap 100
A 205
A 201
A 100
A 108
A 101
S 210
A 103
A 103
SUBJECTS NOT IN THIS TIME TABLE Faculty of Arts and Science Supplemental Examinations
SEPTEMBER, 1932
Date
Hour
First Year
Second Year
Third and
Fourth Years
Wednesday,
September 14th
Thursday,
September 15th
Friday,
September 16th
Saturday,
September 17th
Monday,
September 19th
Tuesday,
September 20th
Wednesday,
September 21st
9   A.M.
2   P.M.
9  A.M.
2  P.M.
9  A.M.
2   P.M.
9  A.M.
9  A.M.
2   P.M.
9  A.M.
2   P.M.
9  A.M.
2  P.M.
History 1, 2, 3 	
English Literature
Latin Authors
Chemistry 1 	
Latin Composition
French 	
Geometry	
Greek 	
Physics 1, 2
Trigonometry
Algebra 	
English Composition
German 	
Biology 1	
Economics 1
Geography 	
History 1, 2, 3	
English Literature
Latin 2
Chemistry 1, 2
French
Geometry ....
Greek 	
Physics 1, 2, 3 ...
Logic	
Botany 	
Calculus   	
Zoology 1	
Algebra 	
Psychology  	
English Composition
Biology 1 	
German  	
Economics 1, 2
Geography 	
o
to
►
o
ej
r1
H
O
>
>
a
w
o
s
o FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE
The degrees offered in this Faculty are Bachelor of Arts
(B.A.), Bachelor of Commerce (B.Com.), and Master of
Arts (M.A.)
Courses which do not lead to degrees are offered in
Teacher Training and Social Service.
♦COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.
The degree of B.A. is granted with Honours or as a
Pass degree. A Pass degree will be granted on completion
of courses amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with
Calendar regulations. No distinction is made between
Pass and Honour students in the First and Second Years,
except as regards prerequisites for later work, but in the
Third and Fourth Years there are special requirements
for Honour students.
Students holding the degree of B.Com. from this University may proceed to the degree of B.A. in one year by
completing 15 additional units of work open to students
in their Third and Fourth Years, provided that their
additional units are chosen so as to complete the requirements for the B.A. degree.
It is also possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees
concurrently in five years on completion of 75 units chosen
so as to cover the requirements for both degrees.
Double courses are offered in Arts and Science and
Applied Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc,
or B.A. and B.A.Sc. (in Nursing).
Credit will not be given for more than 15 units in the
First or Second Year of the Winter Session; nor for more
than 18 units in the Third or Fourth Year.  (See regula-
*The University reserves the right to limit the registration in, or to cancel, any
of the courses listed in this Faculty. Limitation may be imposed if the numbers
desiring any course are found to be too large for the lecture rooms and laboratories
available for that course, or for the number of instructors in the Department concerned, or for the equipment and supplies which can be obtained. Certain courses
may be cancelled if the numbers of instructors in the Departments concerned prove
to be inadequate to offer all the courses listed. 76 Faculty of Arts and Science
tions under "First and Second Years" and "Third and
Fourth Years.")
Credits obtained at the Summer Session (see "University Summer Session") may be combined with Winter Session credits to complete the 60 units required for the degree
of B.A.; but not more than 30 units of credit may be obtained in the two academic years subsequent to Junior
Matriculation nor more than 15 in the academic year
subsequent to Senior Matriculation. The degree of B.A.
will not be granted within three years from Senior Matriculation nor within four years from Junior Matriculation.
The maximum credit for Summer Session work in any
one Calendar year is 6 units; and the maximum credit for
work other than that of the regular Summer and Winter
Sessions is 3 units per academic year, and 15 units in all
subsequent to Senior Matriculation or First Year Arts.
No credit will be granted for work done at other universities in the same academic year in which work has been
attempted at this University, whether in the Summer Session or in the Winter Session or otherwise. Extra-mural
work done at other universities prior to registration at
this University may be accepted, if approved by the Faculty,
but may not exceed 3 units in respect of any one academic
year or 15 units in all subsequent to Senior Matriculation.
If a student is granted credit for extra-mural work taken
elsewhere the number of units which he may take at this
University without attendance at a Winter or Summer
Session will be correspondingly reduced.
Candidates for the degree of B.A. are advised to attend
at least one Winter Session, preferably that of the Fourth
Year. A student seeking the degree of B.A. without attending a Winter Session in his Fourth Year will be required to write, in addition to the examinations in each
course, one paper in each of the two departments in which
his major work has been done. This paper will be on the
whole of the student's work in the department during his
Third and Fourth Years. First and Second Years 77
Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally
consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory
period of not less than two or more than three hours) each
week throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or
equivalent laboratory periods) throughout a single term.
Note:—Students in any of the affiliated Theological
Colleges who file with the Registrar a written statement
expressing their intention of graduating in Theology will
be allowed to offer in each year of their Arts course, in
place of optional subjects set down in the Calendar for
the Year and course in which they are registered, Religious
Knowledge options, to the extent of three units taken from
the following list: Hebrew, Biblical Literature, New Testament Greek, Church History, Christian Ethics and Apologetics.
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS
1. The requirements of the first two years consist of
30 units, 15 of which must be taken in each year. Courses
must be chosen in conformity with the requirements that
follow. Details of courses are given under the various
departments.
Each student must take: Units
(a) English 1 in the First Year and
English 2 in the Second Year    6
* (6) The first two courses in a language
offered for Matriculation, one
course in each year     6
(c) Mathematics 1, in the First Year..   3
(d) Economics 1, or History 1 or 2 or
4, or Philosophy 1 (a) and (b) or
Philosophy 1  (c)      3
(e) Biology 1, or Chemistry 1, or Geology 1, or Physics 1, or Physics 2    3
*See Regulation "2." 78 Faculty of Arts and Science
(/)  Three courses—not already chosen
—selected from the following:—
Biology 1, Botany 1, Chemistry
1, Chemistry 2, Economics 1,
Economics 2, French 1, French
2, Geography 1, Geography 5,
Geology 1, Geology 2, fBegin-
ners' German, German 1, German 2, Greek A, Greek 2, History
1, History 2, History 4, Latin 1,
Latin 2 (a), Latin 2 (b), Mathematics 2, Mathematics 3, Mathematics 4, Philosophy 1 (a) and
(b), Philosophy 1 (c), Physics 1
or Physics 2, Physics 3, Zoology 1
Note.—Botany 1, Zoology 1, Geology 1 and
2, Geography 1 and 5, History 4
and Philosophy 1 (c) are not
open to First Year students. Economics 1, and Philosophy 1 are
open to First Year students only
if the permission of the Heads of
these departments is obtained.
History 2 is open to First Year
students only if they are preparing for entrance to the Normal
School. Geology 1, normally a
Third Year subject, may be
taken by Second Year students
(Full Undergraduate and Conditioned). It must be taken in
the Second Year by students intending to take the Honour
course in Geology.
fSee Regulations "3" and "4.' First and Second Years 79
2. Students who have not matriculated in German
may take the Beginners' Course to meet the Junior Matriculation requirements (without University credit) and
follow it up with German 1 and German 2 to satisfy
the language requirements under Section 1 (b). Students
who contemplate specializing in any of the natural sciences
are advised to take German under this regulation.
3. No student in his First Year may elect more than
one beginners' course in a language, and no beginners'
course in a language will count towards a degree unless
followed by a second year's work in that language.
4. Except in the case of beginners' courses, no course
in a language may be taken by a student who has not offered that language at Matriculation. A beginners' course
in a language may not be taken for credit by a student
who has obtained credit for that language at Matriculation.
Greek A.— (which may be taken by students having
no previous knowledge of Greek), followed by Greek 2,
will be accepted as satisfying the Language requirements
in the case of students who have matriculated in Latin.
5. A student taking three languages in the first two
years may defer the course selected under Section 1 (e)
to the Third or Fourth Year, and a student taking four
science courses may defer the course selected under Section 1  (d) to the Third or Fourth Year.
6. Students who intend to enter the Teacher Training
Course are advised to take Philosophy 1 (a) and (b) in
the First or Second Year.
Note:—Students thinking of entering Applied Science
are referred to the list of subjects required to be taken by
them in First Year Arts and to the regulations in reference
to these, given under "Admission" and "General Outline
of Courses" in Applied Science.   They are advised to attend 80 Faculty of Arts and Science
the noon hour talks on the choice of a profession and on the
life and work in vocations likely to appeal to Applied
Science graduates.
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar
regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to
submit to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31st
of each year, a scheme of the courses they propose to take
during their last two years.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consist of 30 units, of which students must take, in their Third
Year, not less than 15 units. The graduation standing is
determined by the results of the Third and Fourth Years
combined.
PASS CURRICULUM
1. A minimum of 15 units must be taken in two Major
subjects, not less than 6 units in either, and a minimum
of 6 units in some other subject or subjects of the Third
and Fourth Years. Work in the First or Second Year is
required in each of the Major subjects, except Education
and Bacteriology. Both Major subjects must be chosen
from one of the following groups:
(a) Bacteriology, Botany, Chemistry, Geology, Mathematics, Physics, Zoology.
(b) Economics, Education (not more than six units),
English, French, German, Government, Greek,
History, Latin, Mathematics, Philosophy.
2. Details of courses available in the Third and Fourth
Years are given under the various departments.
3. Only two subjects (6 units) of the First or Second
Year courses may be taken in the combined Third and
Fourth Years. In a number of these courses extra reading
will be required of Third and Fourth Year students. Honour Courses 81
When two First or Second Year subjects, other than a
Beginner's Language or Language 1, are taken in the Third
and Fourth Years, not more than one of these subjects may
be outside the departments in which the student is doing
his major work.
4. No credit will be given for a language course normally taken in the First Year unless it is taken in the Third
Year and continued in the Fourth Year. Some courses,
however, are intended for Honour students only.
5. Students in the Third and Fourth Years may, with
the consent of the departments concerned, take one or two
courses of private reading (each to count not more than
3 units), provided that:
1. (a)   The candidate for a reading course shall have
completed his First and Second Years and shall
have taken at least 6 units of Third and Fourth
Year work in the subject in which the reading
course is taken; and
(b) shall have made an average of at least Second
Class in the 6 units in question.
2. Both reading courses shall not be chosen in the same
subject.
3. A reading course shall not be taken concurrently
with a Late Afternoon and Saturday Morning Class
or with Summer Session courses except by a student
in the Fourth Year.
Credit for a course of private reading is part of the
maximum of 15 units which may be taken in addition to
the regular work of Winter and Summer Sessions; and no
other additional work may be taken in the same academic
year.
HONOURS
1. Students whose proposed scheme of work involves
Honour courses must obtain the consent of the departments
concerned and of the Dean before entering on these courses;
and this consent will normally be granted only to those students who have a clear academic record at the end of their 82 Faculty of Arts and Science
Second Year with at least Second Class standing in the
subject or subjects of specialization. (Cards of application for admission to Honour courses may be obtained
at the Registrar's office.)
2. Certain departments offer Honour courses either
alone or in combination with other departments. For Honours in a single department, at least 18 of the requisite
30 units must be taken in the department concerned, and
at least 6 outside it. For Honours in combined courses, at
least 12 units are required in each of two subjects. Particulars of these courses are given below.
3. Candidates for Honours may, with the consent of
the Department concerned, offer a special reading course
(to count not more than 3 units) in addition to the read-
ding courses offered on page      section 5.
4. All candidates for Honours may, at the option of
the department or departments concerned, be required to
present a graduating essay embodying the results of some
investigation that they have made independently. Credit
for the graduating essay will be not less than 3 or more than
6 units.
5. Candidates for Honours are required, at the end of
their Fourth Year, to take a general examination, oral or
written, or both, as the department or departments concerned shall decide. This examination is designed to test
the student's knowledge of his chosen subject or subjects
as a whole, and is in addition to the ordinary class examinations of the Third and Fourth Years.
6. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second
Class. Students who, in the opinion of the department concerned, have not attained a sufficiently high ranking may
be awarded a pass degree. If a combined Honour course
is taken, First Class Honours will be given only if both the
departments concerned agree; and an Honour degree will
be withheld if either department refuses a sufficiently high
grade. Honour Courses 83
7. It is hoped to offer the following Honour Courses
during the session 1932-33. But, if, for the reasons stated
in the footnote to page 75, it is found impossible to do so,
the University reserves the right to refuse new registrations in any of them.
HONOUR COURSES IN SINGLE DEPARTMENTS
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:—Biology   1,   Chemistry   1,   Botany   1,
Chemistry 2 and 3.   Physics 1 or 2, and Zoology 1 are re-
Students   specializing  in   Entomology  may  substitute
Zoology 9 for one of the required courses given above.
quired before completion of the course and should be taken
as early as possible.
Required Courses:—Botany 3, 4, 5 (a), and 6 (c).
Optional Courses:—Biology 2 and 3; courses in Botany
not specifically required; and courses in Zoology. Optional
courses should be selected in consultation with the department.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, Chemistry 1.
Physics 1 or 2, Botany 1, Chemistry 2 and 3 are required
before completion of the course and should be taken as early
as possible.
Required Courses:—Zoology 2, 3, 5, 6.
Optional Courses:—Zoology 4, 7, 8, 9; courses in Botany; Geology 6. These optional courses should be selected
in consultation with the Head of the department.
Chemistry
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2 and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Candidates are required to complete the following courses: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 and 10. 84 Faculty of Arts and Science
Classics
Course:—Any three of Greek 3, 5, 6, 7; any three of
Latin 3, 4, 5, 6; and either Greek 9 or Latin 7.
As proof of ability to write Greek and Latin prose,
candidates must attain not less than Second Class standing in Greek 8 and Latin 8. During the candidate's Fourth
Year, papers will be set on sight translation, and the
candidate is advised to pursue a course of private reading
under the supervision of the department.
There will also be a general paper on Antiquities, Literature and History.
Economics
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or
German. A paper in translation to be written at the end
of the Fourth Year will be required to ensure that this
knowledge has been kept up.
Course:—Economics 2, if not already taken, any 15 further units in the department, to include Economics 4, Economics 9, and Statistics 1, and two from the following group:
Economics 3, Economics 5, Economics 6, Economics
7, Economics 11, Statistics 2, Government 1, Sociology 1.
Also a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial
instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination, and, if required,
address a general audience on a designated subject.
Attendance at the Seminar in Economics is required in
the Third and Fourth Years.
Economics and Political Science
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. A paper in translation to be written at the end of
the Fourth Year will be required to ensure that this know-
edge has been kept up.
Course:—Economics 2, if not already taken, any 15 further units in the department to include Government 1,
Statistics 1, and three from the following group: Honour Courses 85
Sociology 1, Sociology 2, Government 2, Government
3, Government 4, Economics 3, Economics 4, Economics 5,
Economics 6, Economics 7, Economics 9, Statistics 2.
Also a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be arranged in connection with the
essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination and, if required, address a general audience on a designated subject.
Attendance at the Seminar in Economics is required in
the Third and Fourth Years.
English Language and Literature
Prerequisites: Satisfactory work in English 2c or its
equivalent, and a reading knowledge of French or German.
The Department may require candidates to write a paper
in translation at the end of the Fourth Year.
Course:—English 25 (involving an examination on the
life, times, and complete works of some major English
author), 20, 21 (a), 21 (b), 22, 24 (the seminar, which
must be attended in both years, though credit will be given
only for the work of the final year), and a graduating essay
which will count 3 units.
Candidates will be required to take the following final
Honours examinations on the History of English Literature:
1. From the beginning to 1500.
2. From 1500 to 1660.
3. From 1660 to 1780.
4. From 1780 to 1890.
One of these examinations will be oral .
In the award of Honours special importance will be
attached to the graduating essay and to the final Honours
examinations.
If the candidate's work outside the department does not
include a course in English History, he must take an examination in that subject. 86 Faculty of Arts and Science
Geology
Prerequisites:—Geology 1. If possible Geology 2 also
should be taken in the Second Year. Chemistry 1 should be
taken in the First Year as it is prerequisite to Geology 2
and is also of great value in Geology 1. Physics 1 or 2
should also be taken in the First Year. Biology 1 is recommended in the Second Year as it is prerequisite to Zoology
1 which should be taken in the Third Year as a valuable
preparation for Geology 6.
Courses:—18 units to be chosen from Geology 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, 10, 12. If Geology 2 has not been taken in the Second
Year it must be taken in the Third Year as it is prerequisite
to Geology 7 and 8.
History
Course:—Any 18 units, of which the graduating essay
will count 3 units. The seminar (which carries no credit)
must be attended in the Third and the Fourth Years. A
reading knowledge of French is required.
French
Course:—French 3 (a), 3 (b), 3 (c) in the Third Year.
French 4 (a), 4 (b), 4 (<;) in the Fourth Year.
A graduating essay (in French) which will count 3 units.
Latin
Latin 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 and Greek 9. The candidate must
also take Latin 8 in both years, obtaining at least second
class standing. His general knowledge will be tested by
papers on Antiquities, Literature, and History at the end
of the Fourth Year.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Any 18 units in Mathematics, and Physics 3
and 5. Mathematics 3 or 4, but not both, may be taken among
the requisite 18 units. A final Honours examination is required. Honour Courses 87
Physics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2, Chemistry 1.
Course:—Mathematics 10, 16, 17. Physics 3 and 5,
and 15 additional units. Students are advised to take Chemistry 4 and 7, if possible.
COMBINED HONOUR COURSES
(a) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Bacteriology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Biology 1; Botany
1, or Zoology 1.
Course:—Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5; the required courses
for either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the
Honour course in Biology.
(b) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Biology 1; Geology 1.
Course:—Geology 2 and 6; the required courses for
either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in Biology.
(c) Chemistry and Biology (Botany and Zoology)
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Phyics 1 or 2;
Biology 1.
Course:—Chemistry 3, 4, 5, 7 and 9; the required courses
for either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the
Honour course in Biology.
(d) Chemistry and Physics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2 and
Mathematics 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and Physics 3,
5, 8 or 19, and two units from 7,10,12,13 or 14. Candidates
are advised to take Mathematics 10. 88 Faculty of Arts and Science
(e) Chemistry and Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2; and Geology 1.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and at least 12
units in Geology.
(f) Chemistry and Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2; and Geo-
matics 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and at least 12 units
in Mathematics, including Mathematics 10.
A^^k
(g) Mathematics and Physics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2; Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Mathematics, at least 12 units, including
Mathematics 10, 16 and 17.
Physics, at least 12 units, including Physics 3, if not
already taken, and Physics 5.
(h) Any Two of:
Economics or Economics and Political Science, English, French, History, Latin, Philosophy.
Economics or Economics and Political Science
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. A paper in translation to be written at the end of
the Fourth Year will be required to ensure that this knowledge has been kept up.
Course in Economics:—12 units, including Economics
4, Economics 9, Statistics 1, and Economics 2, if not already
taken.
Course in Economics and Political Science:—12 units,
including Government 1, Statistics 1 and Economics 2, if
not already taken. Honour Courses 89
English
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. The Department may require candidates to write a
paper in translation at the end of the Fourth Year.
Course:—English 20 and 24, and any three of the English courses of the first division. The seminar must be
attended during both the final years, but credits which
count for the B.A. degree will be given only for the work of
the Fourth Year.
Candidates will be required to take the following final
Honours examinations on the History of English Literature:
1. From 1500 to 1660.
2. From 1660 to 1780.
3. From 1780 to 1890.
In the award of Honours special importance will be
attached to these examinations.   One of them will be oral.
French
Course:—If the graduating essay is written on a
French subject, 3 (a) and 3 (c), 4 (a) and 4 (c) ; otherwise
either these courses or 3 (a) and 3 (b), 4 (a) and 4 (6).
Courses 3 (b) and 4 (b) are intended primarily for Honour students and should be taken whenever possible, even
if they are not required to make up the minimum number
of units.
History
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French.
Course:—History 10 and any 9 additional units, of
which the graduating essay, if written in History, will count
3 units.
The seminar (which carries no credits) must be attended in the Third and Fourth Years.
Latin
Course:—Latin 8 and any four of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. In the
final   year   candidates must pass an examination  (a)  in 90 Faculty of Arts and Science
sight translation, and (b) in Latin Literature, History and
Antiquities. Private reading under the direction of the
department is recommended.
Philosophy
Course:—Any 12 units besides Philosophy 1, six units
in each year.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.COM.
The degree of B. Com. is granted with Honours or as
a Pass degree. A Pass degree will be granted on completion of courses amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity
with Calendar regulations.
Students holding the degree of B.A. from this University may proceed to the degree of B.Com. by completing
15 additional units of work, provided that the additional
units are chosen so as to complete the requirements for
the B.Com. degree.
It is also possible to obtain the B.A. and B.Com. degrees
concurrently in five years on completion of 75 units chosen
so as to cover the requirements for both degrees.
No distinction is made between Pass and Honour students in the First and Second Years; but a student will not
be accepted as a candidate for Honours in the Third Year
unless he has obtained an average of second class on the
courses required to be taken in the Second Year.
While the B.A. degree can be completed in one year by
students holding the B.Com. degree the converse is not true
as work in two consecutive years is required for the B.
Com. degree in both Accountancy and Commercial Law.
It is, however, possible for students who are taking the combined degree in five years to qualify for the B.A. degree at
the end of four years by taking additional courses either in
Winter or Summer Session to make up for the six units of
Accountancy and Commercial Law 1 which do not count
towards the B.A. degree. Courses Leading to the Degree of B.Com.       91
The regulations as to Summer Session credits, number
of units to be taken in any academic year, etc., apply to
courses leading to the degree of B.Com. in the same way as
to courses leading to the degree of B.A.
During the summer vacations students are advised to
obtain as much business experience as possible.
First Year
The following courses comprising 15 units are required:
English 1.
The first course in a language offered for matriculation (Latin or French or German or Greek).
Mathematics 1.
Economics 1.
One course selected from the following: Biology 1, Chemistry 1, Physics 1, or Physics 2.
Second Year
The following courses comprising 15 units are required:
English 2.
A continuation course in the language taken in the
First Year.
Mathematics 3.
Economics 2.
Geography 5.
A clear academic record at the end of the Second Year
will be required of students proceeding to the Third Year.
In view of the importance which rightly attaches to
the capacity for adequate and clear expression in writing,
regulation 13, on page 104 of the Calendar, will be rigidly
enforced at the end of the Second Year, and a reasonable
legibility in handwriting will be insisted on.
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar
regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised
to submit to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31
of each year, a scheme of the courses they propose to take
during their last two years. 92 Faculty of Arts and Science
Third and Fourth Years
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years comprise 30 units, of which students must take, in their Third
Year, not less than 15 units. The graduation standing is
determined by the results of the Third and Fourth Years
combined. Courses must be chosen in conformity with the
requirements that follow.
Each student must take:
(a) An additional course in a language already taken
for credit in the first two years, that is French,
German or Latin (to be taken in the Third
Year), or an additional course in English.
3 units.
(b) The following seven courses:
Economics 4.    (Money and Banking)
Economics 6.    (Foreign Trade)
Commercial Law 1.
Commercial Law 2.
Accountancy 1.
Statistics  1.
Accountancy 2 or Accountancy 3. 21 units.
(c) One of the following courses:
Economics 19. (Marketing).
Statistics 2.
Economics 11.    (Transportation) 3 units.
(d) Mathematics 3, if not already chosen, otherwise
one course—not already chosen—selected from
the following:
Accountancy 2 or Accountancy 3.
Statistics 2.
Economics 11  (Transportation).
Government 1.
Government 4.
Economics 5 (Taxation.)
Mathematics 2.
Education (3 units.) Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 93
English, if not chosen under (a), (3 units).
Additional   course   in   Latin,   French   or
German.
Geology  (3 units).
Forestry (3 units).
Mining (3 units).
Agricultural Economics 1.
Biology  (3 units). 3 units.
In the Fourth Year satisfactory work must be done in
connection with a discussion class of one hour a week.
HONOURS
1. Candidates for Honours are required to take Statistics 2 and to present a graduating essay embodying the
results of some investigation that they have made independently. Credit for the graduating essay will be 3 units.
These requirements take the place of the options offered
to Pass students under (c) and (d) above.
2. Candidates for Honours are required at the end of
their Fourth Year to take a general examination, oral or
written or both. This examination is designed to test the
student's knowledge of his chosen subject as a whole and
is in addition to the ordinary class examinations of the
Third and Fourth Years.
3. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second
Class. First Class Honours will not be given unless the
Graduating Essay is First Class nor will Second Class
Honours be given unless the Graduating Essay is at least
Second Class. Students who, in the opinion of the department, have not attained a sufficiently high ranking for
Honours may be awarded a Pass degree.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.
1. Candidates for the M.A. degree must hold the B.A.
degree from this University, or its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his application, on or before September 1st, an 94 Faculty of Arts and Science
official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of his
course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such
a student in this University. The fee for examination of
certificates is $2.00. This fee must accompany the application.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
To spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(i) To do two or more years of private work under
the supervision of the University, such work
to be equivalent to one year of graduate study;
or
(ii) To do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident graduate study, the total of such work to be equivalent to one year of resident graduate study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required. In general the minor shall be taken outside the Department in
which the student is taking his major, but special permission
may be given by the Faculty to take both major and minor
in the same department, provided the subjects are different and are under different professors. The major or the
minor may, with the consent of the Department or the
Departments concerned, be extended to include work in
an allied subject.
5. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standard-
sized thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular
of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.")
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall
be made to the Registrar by October 1st.
7. The following requirements apply to all Departments:
Prerequisites: Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 95
Minor:—For a minor, courses regularly offered in the
Third and Fourth years amounting to at least
six units are prerequisite, and at least second
class standing must have been obtained in
each of these courses. For details of requirements, see regulations of the several departments.
Major:—For a major, courses regularly offered in the
Third and Fourth years amounting to at least
eight units are prerequisite, and at least second
class standing must have been obtained in each
of these courses. For details of requirements,
see regulations of the several departments.
Students who have not fulfilled the requirements outlined above during their undergraduate course may fulfil
the same by devoting more than one academic year's study
to the M.A. work.
M.A. Courses:
Minor:—Five or six units of regular Third or Fourth
year work, or equivalents in reading courses.
Examinations to be written, or oral, or both
at the discretion of the Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in
the subjects of the minor.
Major:—Nine or ten units of regular Third or Fourth
year work, or equivalents in reading courses,
of which units three to six shall be counted for
the thesis.
All candidates must submit to a general examination on the major field. This examination
may be written, or oral, or both, at the discretion of the Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in the
work of the major. 96 Faculty of Arts and Science
Languages:—No candidate will receive the degree of
M.A. who has not satisfied the Head of the Department in
which he is majoring of his ability to read technical articles
either in French or in German.
8. Philosophy 7 and 9 will be accepted as prerequisites
for a minor in Education, if these subjects have not already
been counted as prerequisites towards a major or a minor
in Philosophy.
Graduate students, who are Assistants, giving not more
than four hours a week of tutorial instruction, are permitted
to qualify for the M.A. degree after one regular winter
session of University attendance, provided they have done,
in the Summer vacation, research work of a nature and extent satisfactory to the Head of the Department concerned.
Such students must be registered as graduate students and
must have secured the approval of the Head of the Department concerned and of the Faculty before entering upon
the research in question. Other graduate students doing
tutorial work shall not be allowed to come up for final examination in less than two academic years after registration
as M.A. students.
The following special requirements are prescribed by
different departments:
i Bacteriology
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Zoology 1, Biology 3, Chemistry 3.
Major:—Bacteriology 1, 2, 5, and Bacteriology 3 or 6.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Chemistry 9 a, Chemistry 19, Zoology 5.
Major:—Thesis, five or six units, and other courses to
complete required units.
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany
and Zoology.
Major:—Biology 1,   Botany   1,   and   eight   additional
units, including Zoology 1. Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.    97
M.A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation
with the Department.
Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses
to complete required units.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany
and Zoology.
Major:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, and eight additional units,
including Botany 1.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the Department.
Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses
to complete the required number of units.
Economics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—A minimum of fifteen units of work in subjects in the Department, or an equivalent. The
fifteen units must include Economics 4, Economics 9, and Statistics 1.
Major:—Honours in Economics; or in Economics in
combination with some other subject; or an
equivalent.
Economics and Political Science
Prerequisites:
Minor:—A minimum of fifteen units in the Department (or an equivalent), including Government
1 and Statistics 1.
Major:—Honours in Economics and Political Science;
or in Economics; or in Economics in combination with some other subject; or an equivalent.
M.A. Course:
All candidates for the Master's degree in this Department must attend the Honour Seminar. 98 Faculty of Arts and Science
English
Prerequisites:
Minor:—At least nine   units   of   credit   for   English
courses elective in the Third and Fourth years
of the undergraduate curriculum.
Major:—At least fifteen  units of credit for courses
elective in the Third and Fourth years.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Six units of credit in advanced  courses in
English not already taken.
Major:— (a) Twelve units of credit in advanced courses
not already taken, one of which courses
must be English 21a, or its equivalent, if
this has not been previously offered for
credit.
(b) A graduating essay which will count as
an advanced course involving three units
of credit.  .
(c) Oral examinations on the history of English Literature.
(d) A reading knowledge of either French or
German. A student who offers both languages will be allowed three units of credit
towards the M.A. degree.
French
Detailed Study:
(a) O.F.—Aucassin et Nicolette.
(b) XVIth Century — Montaigne, Essais, Hatier.
Chefs-d'oeuvre poetiques du XVIe siecle, Hatier.
Less Detailed:
(c) XVllth Century and after—The evolution of the
French Novel, particularly the novels treated in
Le Breton's Roman au XVIIe siecle, and the chief
Romantic Novels.
(d) XVIIIth Century—Beaumarchais, Barbier de Seville. Rousseau, La Nouvelle Heloise—Emile. Diderot, Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A. 99
Le Neveu de Rameau. Voltaire, Les Lettres philo-
sophiques.
(e) XlXth Century—Auzas, La Poesie au 19e siecle.
(Oxford). Alfred de Musset, Theatre. Oxford.
Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac.    Fasquelle.
(f) A general knowledge of French literary history
from XVIth Century to end of XlXth. This not
to be detailed, but to treat of main movements.
(g) A thesis in French on a subject to be approved by
the Head of the Department.
Note :—It is expected that the candidate will have read
and will be able to discuss three plays of Moliere, three of
Corneille, three of Racine, and something of Boileau, Bos-
suet, Chateaubriand, La Fontaine, Lamartine, Victor Hugo,
Balzac, Flaubert, Anatole France.
Some help will be given by lectures, explanations of
texts, and advice in reading; but the Department cannot
undertake to cover the whole or any considerable part of the
syllabus.
History
 Prerequisites:
Minor:—Two courses   (six units)  to be chosen from
History 10 to 20 inclusive.
Major:—Three courses (nine units) to be chosen from
History 10 to 20 inclusive.
M.A.Course:
Minor:—Two courses (6 units) to be chosen from History 10 to 20 inclusive; or the equivalent in
reading courses.
Major:—Two related courses( six units) to be chosen
from History 10 to 20 inclusive, or the equivalent in Reading Courses, and a thesis embodying original work to which 3 units of credit are
given. All candidates for a major in History
who have not already done so, must attend the 100 Faculty of Arts and Science
Honours Seminar in Historical Method, or submit to an examination on a parallel Reading
Course approved by the Department.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Mathematics 10 and at least two other Honour
Courses.
Major:—Candidates must have completed the Honour
Course in Mathematics, or its equivalent.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Mathematics 16 and an additional three units
to be chosen from the Honour Courses.
Major:—Any four of the graduate courses and a thesis.
Physics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Physics 3 and 5 and at least two more units of
work regularly offered in the Third or Fourth
Year.
Major:—At least eight units of work regularly offered
in the Third and Fourth Years.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Six units of work in advanced courses in Physics not already taken.
Major:—(a)  At least six units of work in the graduate courses,
(b) A thesis.
TEACHER TRAINING COURSE
Candidates qualifying for the "Academic Certificate"
(given by the Provincial Department of Education, Victoria, on the completion of the Teacher Training Course)
take the courses prescribed on Pages 136 to 138. These
courses are open only to graduates registered in the Teacher
Training Course. Teacher Training Course 101
1. Registration
Documentary evidence of graduation in Arts or Science
from a recognized university must be submitted to the Registrar by all candidates other than graduates of the University of British Columbia. All correspondence in connection
with the Teacher Training Course should be addressed to
the Registrar, from whom registration cards may be procured.
2. Certificates and Standing
At the close of the University session successful candidates in the Teacher Training Course will be recommended
to the Faculty of Arts and Science for the University Diploma in Education and to the Provincial Department of
Education for the Academic Certificate. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First Class, an average of
80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent; Passed,
50 to 65 per cent.
All students registered in the Teacher Training Course
at the University are entitled to the privileges accorded to
students in the various faculties, and are also subject to the
regulations of the University regarding discipline and attendance at lectures.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher
Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each
of (1) History and Principles of Education and (2) Educational Psychology is accepted as equivalent to a minor for
an M.A. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the
Head of the Department in which the student wishes to
take his major.
3. Preparatory Courses in Arts and Science
Candidates will not be admitted to courses in High
School Methods unless they have obtained at least nine (9)
units of credit in each of the corresponding subjects from
the academic courses normally offered in the Third and
Fourth Years. Special cases will be decided on their merits
by the Head of the Department concerned and by the Pro- 102
Faculty of Arts and Science
fessor of Education. (The academic courses referred to
above are English, History, Mathematics, etc., and not
courses in Education.)
4. A description of the courses offered is given under
Department of Education.
COURSES LEADING TO THE SOCIAL SERVICE
DIPLOMA
The Diploma in Social Service will be granted on the
completion of courses amounting to 30 units chosen in
conformity with the following outline:
First Year:
Biology 1   (Introductory Biology). 3 units.
Economics 1 (Principles of Economics) or
Economics 2 (Economic History) 3 units
English 1   (Literature and Composition)    3 units
Social Service 1 (Introduction) 2 units
Social Service 2   (Case Work) 1 unit
Social Service 3   (Child Welfare) 1 unit
Social Service 4 (Hygiene) 1 unit
Social Service 9 (Field Work Seminar) 1 unit
Second Year:
Either one of:
Philosophy 1   (a)   (Psychology)
Nursing 24 (Psychology for Nurses) and
Nursing 27  (The Family) 2 units
Any two of:
Philosophy 8 (Social Psychology)
Philosophy 9 (Child Psychology)
Economics 3  (Labour Problems) 6 units
Sociology 1  (General Sociology) 3 units
Social Service 5  (Advanced Case Work) 1 unit
Social Service 6 (a) and (b)   (Advanced Child
Welfare) 1 unit
Soeial Service 7 (Group Work) 1 unit
Social Service 10 (Field Work Seminar)
1 unit Examinations and Advancement 103
A minimum of eight hours' field work each week for
four terms is required. A student must, in addition, spend
two months with an accredited social agency as a full-time
worker under supervision prior to registration for the technical courses of the second year. The agency is not responsible for expenses (such as carfare) incident to the field
work.
Graduates in Arts and Science, who have some experience in social work, and who have taken as part of their
undergraduate courses a sufficient number of the subjects
required for the Diploma in Social Service to enable them to
devote additional time to field work, may be allowed to
obtain the Diploma in one Winter Session and the succeeding Summer Session.
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students, are held in April. In the case of subjects which
are final at Christmas and in the case of courses of the
First and Second Years, examinations will be held in
December as well. Applications for special consideration on
account of illness or domestic afflication must be submitted
to the Dean not later than two days after the close of the
examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for
absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be
presented on the appropriate form which may be obtained
from the Dean's office.
2. The passing mark will be 50 per cent, in each subject, except in the case of First and Second Year students
who during one session do 15 units of regular work, in
which case a percentage of 50 or more will be required in
each subject or a general average of 60 per cent, and
not less than 40 per cent, in each subject. In Beginners' German, however, the passing mark is 50 per
cent. In any course which involves both laboratory
work   and  written   examinations,   students   may  be   de- 104 Faculty of Arts and Science
barred from examinations if they fail to present satisfactory
results in laboratory work, and they will be required to pass
in both parts of the course.
3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First
Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65
to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
4. A student who makes 50 per cent, of the total required for a full year's work (at least 15 units chosen in
conformity with calendar regulations), but who fails in an
individual subject, will be granted a supplemental examination in that subject if he has not fallen below 30 per cent,
in that subject. If his mark is below 30 per cent, a supplemental examination will not be granted. Notice will be
sent to all students to whom supplemental examinations
have been granted.
A student who makes less than 50 per cent, of the total
required for a full years' work (15 units) will not be allowed
a supplemental examination.
5. A request for the re-reading of an answer paper
must be forwarded to the Registrar WITHIN FOUR
WEEKS after the results of the examinations are announced. Each applicant must state clearly his reasons for
making such a request in view of the fact that the paper
of a candidate who makes less than a passing mark in a
subject is read at least a second time before results are
tabulated and announced. A re-reading of an examination
paper will be granted only with the consent of the Head of
the Department concerned. The fee for re-reading a paper
is  $2.00.
6. Supplemental Examinations will be held in September
in respect of Winter Session examinations, and in June or
July in respect of Summer Session examinations. In the
Teacher Training Course Supplemental Examinations will
be held not earlier than the third week in June. To pass Examinations and Advancement 105
a supplemental examination a candidate must obtain at
least 50 per cent.
In the first three years a candidate who has been
granted a supplemental may try the supplemental only
once. If he fails in the supplemental he must either repeat his attendance in the course or substitute an alternative chosen in accordance with Calendar regulations.
This regulation will apply in respect of examinations held
at Christmas, 1932, and subsequently. In the case of
Fourth Year students two supplemental examinations in
respect of the same course will be allowed.
A candidate with a supplemental examination outstanding in any subject which is on the Summer Session curriculum may clear his record by attending the Summer Session course in the subject and passing the required examinations.
7. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by the necessary fees (see schedule of Fees), must be
in the hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the
date set for the examinations.
8. No student may enter a higher year with standing
defective in respect of more than 3 units. (See regulations
in regard to advancement to Third Year Commerce, page 91,
and in reference to admission to Second Year Applied Science, page 79).
No student who has failures or supplementals outstanding in more than 3 units, or who has any failure or supplemental outstanding for more than a year of registered
attendance, shall be allowed to register for more than 15
units of work, these units to include either the subject (or
subjects) in which he is conditioned or permissible substitutes.
9. A student may not continue in a later year any subject in which he has a supplemental examination outstand- 106 Faculty of Arts and Science
ing from an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory
subjects in the Second Year.
10. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher
year may not register as a partial student in respect of the
subjects of that higher year. But a student who is required
to repeat his year will be exempt from attending lectures
and passing examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least 50 per cent. In this case he may take,
in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year.
11 A student who fails twice in the work of the same
year may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to withdraw from the University.
12. Any student whose academic record, as determined
by the tests and examinations of the first term of the First
or Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the
recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate
to discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to
the University as long as any supplementary examinations
are oustanding.
13. Term essays and examination papers will be refused
a passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English;
and, in this event, students will be required to pass a
special examination in English to be set by the Department
of English.
DEPARTMENTS IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
Department of Bacteriology
Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill.
Instructor: Helen M. Mathews.
Instructor: D. C. B. Duff.
1. General Bacteriology.—A course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The history of bacteriology, the place of bacteria in
nature, the classification of bacterial forms, methods of
culture and isolation and various bactericidal substances Bacteriology 107
and conditions will be studied. The relationship of bacteria
to agriculture, household science, and public health will
be carefully considered.
Text-book: Lutman, Microbiology, latest edition, McGraw-Hill.
Students  proceeding to  Bacteriology 2 need procure
Park, Williams & Krumweide only (see Bacteriology 2).
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1, and Biology 1.
Seven hours a week.    First Term. 2 units.
2. Special Bacteriology.—A course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The more common pathogenic bacteria will be studied,
together with the reactions of the animal body against invasion by these bacteria. The course will include demonstrations in immunity and the various diagnostic methods
in use in public health laboratories.
Text-book: Park, Williams & Krumwiede, Pathogenic
Microorganisms, latest edition, Lea & Febiger.
For reference: Jordan, General Bacteriology, latest
edition, Saunders; Lutman, Microbiology.
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
Seven hours a week.   Second Term. 2 units.
3. As in Dairying 3 (under Faculty of Agriculture.)
iy<2, units.
4. As in dairying 5 (under Faculty of Agriculture.)
iy?, units.
5. Advanced Bacteriology.—A reading and laboratory
course, including immunology. Tutorial instruction of one
hour per week; laboratory and demonstration hours to be
arranged with the class.
For reference: Topley & Wilson, Principles of Bacteriology and Immunity, latest edition, Wm. Wood & Co.;
Kolmer, Infection and Immunity, latest edition, Saunders;
Jordan and Falk, Newer Knowledge of Bacteriology and 108 Faculty of Arts and Sconce
Immunity, Univ. of Chicago Press; Park, Williams and
Krumwiede, Pathogenic Microorganisms, latest edition,
Lea & Febiger; Current Bacteriological Journals.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1 and 2, with at least second
class standing in Bacteriology 2.
6. Soil Bacteriology.—A laboratory and lecture course,
in which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and
quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility.
Text-book: Lohnis and Fred, Text-book of Agricultural
Bacteriology, Latest Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Bacteriology 1.
Six hours a week.   First term. 2 units.
7. As in Dairying 7 (under Faculty of Agriculture).
3 units.
8. Reading Course in Bacteriology: a directed reading
course in advanced bacteriology or immunity. Written
or oral examination to be given at the discretion of the
department.
Prerequisites: Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5. (The course in
certain cases may run concurrently with Bacteriology 5.)
3 units.
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor: Frank Dickson.
Associate Professor: John Davidson.
Assistants:	
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to
more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses
closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture,
Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationship of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and
division of labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
The course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany and
Zoology. Botany 109
Text-book: Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea &
Febiger.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week.   3 units.
2. (a) Principles of Genetics.—The fundamentals of
Genetics illustrated by the race histories of certain plants
and animals; the physical basis of heredity; variations;
mutations; acquired characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications.
Text-book: Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard
Press.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period a week. First
Term. IV2 units.
2. (6) Principles of Genetics.—A continuation of the
studies of genetic principles with suggested applications.
A lecture and laboratory course. The laboratory work
will consist of problems, examination of illustrative material and experiments with Drosophila.
Text-book: Sinnott and Dunn, Principles of Genetics,
McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (a).
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. iy2 units.
2. (c) An introduction to biometrical methods as applied to genetics.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (a).
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week. First
Term. 1 unit.
2. (d) A review of advanced phases and the more recent development in genetics.
Prerequisite: Biology 2 (b).
Two hours a week.    Second Term. 1 unit.
3. General Physiology.—A study of animal and plant
life processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth
Years having prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics;
the Department should be consulted. 110 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-book: Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology,
Longmans, Green.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Reference reading.   Second Term. 3 units.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of the several fields of Botany and introductory to
more specialized courses in Botany.
This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany, except the Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units)
toward Botany 1 may be obtained through the Evening
Course.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite: Biology 1. ^aw
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week.   3 units.
2. Morphology.—A comparative study of plant structures. The relationship of plant groups. Comparative
life-histories. Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant structures, from the lower to the higher
forms, involving a progressive differentiation accompanied
by an interdependence of parts.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First
Term. (Not given in 1932-33) 2 units.
3. Plant Physiology.
3 (a) Text-book: 0. Raber, Principles of Plant Physiology, 1929, MacMillan.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week.
First Term. 2 units.
3 (b) This course comprises a more advanced study
of the organic constituents of plants and the physiological
changes occuring during plant growth. Botany 111
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week.
First Term. 2 units.
3 (c) A course dealing with the underlying principles
and latest developments of such subjects as utilization
of inorganic elements, nitrogen relations, plant buffer
systems, permeability, photosynthesis, respiration, enzyme
action and growth rates. This course includes laboratory
and greenhouse experiments designed to train students of
the plant sciences in an understanding of the inter-relations
of plants and soils.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work a week.
Second Term. 2 units.
4. Histology: A study of the structure and development of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use
of microscope, camera lucida, photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-books: Eames and McDaniels, Introduction to
Plant Anatomy, McGraw-Hill. Chamberlain, Methods in
Plant Histology, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Seven hours a week. Second Term. 2 units.
5. Systematic Botany.
5 (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of
economic plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial arts; harmful to crops and
stock.   Weeds, and poisonous plants.    Methods of control.
Prerequisite:   Botany 1.
Texts: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, University of California; Thomson and Sifton, Poisonous Plants
and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. First
Term. 11/2 units.
5(6) Dendrology: A study of the forest trees of Canada,
the common shrubs of British   Columbia,   the  important 112 Faculty of Arts and Science
trees of the United States which are not native to Canada.
Emphasis on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction
of keys.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa; Sudworth, Forest
Trees of the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington; Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew, T. F. Unwin.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory or field work a week. 2 units.
5 (c) Descriptive Taxonomy: An advanced course dealing with the collection, preparation and classification of
"flowering plants." Methods of field, herbarium and laboratory work. Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification.   Nomenclature.
Prerequisites:   Botany 1 and 5 (a).
Texts: Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley
& Sons; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage,
Toronto.
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. lVa units.
6 (b) Forest Pathology: Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other
plant parasites of forest.
Text-book: Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week during
one-half of the Second Term. V2 unit. Botany 113
6 (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary).—A course similar
to 6 (a), but including more details concerning the diseases
studied.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 2 units.
6 (d) Plant Pathology (Advanced).—A course designed
for Honour or Graduate students. Technique, isolation
and culture work; inoculations; details concerning the various stages in the progress of plant diseases; a detailed
study of control measures.
Prerequisite: Botany 6 (c).
One lecture and four hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
6 (e) Mycology.—A course designed to give the student
a general knowledge of the fungi from a taxonomic point
of view.
Text-books: Stevens, Plant Disease Fungi, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Credit
will be given for a collection of fungi made during the
summer preceding the course.   First Term. 2 units.
6 (/) History of Plant Pathology.—A lecture course
dealing with the history of the science of Plant Pathology
from ancient times to the present.
Text-book: Whetzel, An Outline of the History of Phytopathology, Saunders.
Prerequisite: Botany 6 (c).
One lecture a week.   Second Term. y% unit.
(Not given in 1932-33) 114 Faculty of Arts and Science
7. Plant Ecology.
7 (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The interrelations of forest trees and their environment; the biological
characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions; physiography.
Reference books: Whitford and Craig, Forest of British
Columbia, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forest of the
World, McGraw-Hill; Hardy, The Geography of Plants,
Oxford University Press.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and one period of field and practical work
a week.   First Term. 1 unit.
Evening and Short Courses in Botany
A Course in General Botany, comprising approximately
fifty lectures, is open to all interested in the study of plant
life of the Province. No entrance examination and no
previous knowledge of the subject is required.
The course is designed to assist teachers, gardeners,
foresters, and other lovers of outdoor life in the Province.
As far as possible, illustrative material will be selected
from the flora of British Columbia.
The classes meet every Tuesday   evening   during  the
University session   (Sept.-May)   from 7.30   to   9.30   p.m.
Field or laboratory work, under direction, is regarded as a
regular part of the course.
No examination is required except in the case of University students desiring credit for this course. Biology 1
is a prerequisite in the case of students desiring credit for
this course. This course may be substituted for the lecture
part of Botany; but credit is not given until the laboratory
work is complete.
Other students desiring to ascertain their standing in
the class may apply for a written test.
A detailed statement of requirements and of work
covered in this course is issued as a separate circular.
Copies may be had on request. Chemistry 115
Department of Chemistry
Professor:  R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald.
Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: William Ure.
Assistants:	
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give
a full exposition of the general principles involved in modern Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the
properties of the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their compounds, and the application of
Chemistry in technology.
Text-book: Smith's, College Chemistry, revised by Kendall, 1929 Edition.   The Century Co.
For the Laboratory: Harris and Ure, Experimental
Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-Hill.
Three lectures and three hours laboratory a week.
3 units.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—A study of the chemical
reactions of the common metallic and acid radicals, together with the theoretical considerations involved in these
reactions.
Text: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
Reference: Miller, The Elementary Theory of Qualitative Analysis, The Century.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. First
Term.
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the
more important methods of   gravimetric   and  volumetric
analysis.
Text-book: Engelder, Elementary Quantitative Analysis, John Wiley & Sons.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. 116 Faculty of Arts and Science
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 3 units.
Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a).
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study
of the compounds of carbon will include the methods of
preparation and a description of the more important groups
of compounds in both the fatty and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will only be given to those students taking
Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of
Chemistry 2.
Books recommended: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of
Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical-
Methods of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
4 (a) Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course
in the development of modern theoretical chemistry, including a study of gases, liquids and solids, solutions,
ionization and electrical conductivity, chemical equilibrium,
kinetics of reactions, thermochemistry and thermodynamics, colloids.
Text-book: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges,
McGraw-Hill. w
Reference: Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan.
For laboratory use: Findlay, Practical Physical, Chemistry, Longmans; and Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on
Physical Chemical Principles.   Macmillan.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 (except for students majoring in Physics) and Mathematics 2. Honour students
majoring in Chemistry should take Mathematics 10 concurrently.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
4 (b) This course is the same as Chemistry 4 (a) with
the omission of the laboratory, and is open only to students
not majoring in Chemistry. 2 units. Chemistry 117
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis,
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course will
include the detection and separation of the less common
metals, particularly those that are important industrially,
together with the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in nature.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. First
Term.
(b)Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made
will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis
of rocks, as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys.
The principles on which analytical chemistry is based will
receive a more minute consideration than was possible in
the elementary course.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
One lecture and six hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 3 units.
6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries which are
dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be
considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing
establishments in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that
some lectures will be given by specialists in their respective
fields.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation
of Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory
of gases, properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and thermochemistry, properties of solutions,
theoretical electrochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics
of reactions, radioactivity.
Books recommended: Getman, Outlines of Theoretical
Chemistry, Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; For Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experi- 118 Faculty of Arts and Science
ments on Physico-Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical Physical Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
8. Electrochemistry.— (a) Solutions are studied from
the standpoint of the osmotic and dissociation theories.
The laws of electrolysis, electroplating, electromotive
force, primary and secondary cells are considered in detail.
For reference: LeBlanc, Elements of Electrochemistry,
Macmillan; Creighton-Fink, Theoretical Electrochemistry,
Vol. I, Wiley; Allmand, Applied Electrochemistry, Longmans.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First
Term. l1/^ units.
(6) As in Applied Science.
9 (a) Advanced, Organic Chemistry.—The lectures will
deal with some of the more complex carbon compounds,
such as the carbohydrates and their stereochemical configurations, fats, proteins, ure ides and purine derivatives
and enzyme action.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. First
Term. 11/2 unts.
9 (b) The terpenes and alkaloids will be considered.
The more complicated types of organic reaction and various
theoretical conceptions will be presented. In the laboratory some complex compounds will be prepared and quantitative determinations of carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, sulphur and the halogens made.
For reference: Cohen, Organic Chemistry, Arnold.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. IV2 units.
10. History of Chemistry.—Particular attention will be
paid to the development of chemical theory.
Reference: Moore, History of Chemistry, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two hours a week.   Second Term. 1 unit. Chemistry 119
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—Stereochemical theories will be discussed in greater detail than in Chemistry
9, and chemical and physico-chemical methods employed in
determining the constitution of organic compounds will be
studied. The electronic conception of valency as applied
to organic compounds will be considered, and an outline of
the work done in Electro-Organic chemistry will be given.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 7 and 9.
Lectures: 2 units. 2 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—The Chemistry of colloids and
the application of colloidal chemistry to industry.
References: Bogue, Colloidal Behaviour, Vols. I and II,
McGraw-Hill; Freundlich, Colloid Chemistry, Methuen;
Reports on Colloid Chemistry by British Association for
Advancement of Science.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4.
Two hours a week.   First Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—Study of first, second
and third laws. Derivation of fundamental equations and
application to gas laws, chemical equilibrium, theory of
solutions, electro-chemistry and capillarity.
Text-book: Lewis & Randall, Principles of Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill. Reference: Sackur, Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 7.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—A more detailed
treatment of the chemistry of the metals than is possible
in Chemistry 1, together with the chemistry of the Rare
Elements.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 and 4.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.) 120 Faculty of Arts and Science
19. Biochemistry.—This course will deal with such
topics as, some special applications of colloid chemistry to
Biology, the determination of hydrogen-ion concentration,
the chemical and physical processes involved in the digestion, absorption and assimilation of foodstuffs in the animal
body, the intermediate and ultimate products of metabolism, and nutrition.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 9 (a). Chemistry 9 (a)
and 19 may on permission be taken conjointly.
Two lectures.   Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1932-33.)
20. Methods in Teaching High School Chemistry.—
This course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher
Training Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
References: Black and Conant, Practical Chemistry,
The Macmillan Company. Smith's College Chemistry, revised by Kendall, 1929 Edition.   The Century Company.
Three lectures a week.    First Term.
21. Chemical Kinetics.—The applications of statistical
mechanics to chemical problems, such as the rates of thermal and photo-chemical reactions, and the emission and
absorption of radiation by molecules. The Quantum theory
as applied to molecular processes and band spectra.
Reference: Tolman, Statistical Mechanics with Applications to Physics and Chemistry.
Two lectures a week.   Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years) Classics 121
Department of Classics
Professor: Lemuel Robertson.
Professor: O. J. Todd.
Professor: H. T. Logan.
Greek
A.—Homeric Greek, A Book for Beginners, Clyde Pharr,
Heath.
History. — Robertson and Robertson, The Story of
Greece and Rome, Chap. I-XXXII.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
2. Lectures.—Plato, Apology, Adam, Pitt Press; Aeschylus, Prometheus Bound, Sikes and Willson, Macmillan.
Composition.—North and Hillard, Greek Prose Composition, Longmans & Green. Selected passages will occasionally be set for Unseen Translation.
Literature.—Norwood, The Writers of Greece.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
3. Lectures.—Thucydides, History, Book VII, Marchant, Macmillan; Sophocles, Antigone, Jebb and Shuckburgh, Cambridge; Euripides, Iphigenia at Aulis, Head-
lam, Cambridge.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Homer, Iliad (Selections), Monro, Iliad,
2 Vols., Oxford; Demosthenes, Third Olynthiac, First and
Third Philippics, Butcher, Oxford  (Vol. I.).
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
6. Lectures.—Aristophanes, The Birds, Hall and Geldart,
Oxford; Herodotus, History, Bk. VI, Strachan, Macmillan,
(Classical Series); Lysias, Orations (Selections), Hude,
Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.) 122 Faculty of Arts and Science
7. Lectures.—Aristotle, Ars Poetica, Bywater, Oxford;
Plato, The Republic (Selections), Burnet, Oxford. (Open
only to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be
taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
1 unit.
9. Greek History to H A.D.—The course will begin
with a brief survey of contributory civilizations of pre-
Hellenic times and will include a study of social and political life in the Greek world during the period. Knowledge
of Greek is not prerequisite.
Text-books: M. L. W. Laistner, A  Survey  of Ancient
History, Heath; E. S. Shuckburgh, Greece, Fisher Unwin.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
Latin
1. Lectures.—Livy, Bk. XXV, Munro, Oxford Press;
A Book of Latin Poetry, Neville, Jolliffe, Dale, and Pres-
love, Macmillan.
Composition.—Pillsbury, Latin Composition for Upper
and Middle Forms, Clarendon Press.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece
and Rome, Dent, Chap. I to XXXII.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2 (a) Lectures.—Virgil, Aeneid, Bk. VI, Page, Macmillan; Cicero, Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan; Horace, Odes II,
Page, Macmillan.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece
and Rome, Dent, Chap. XXXII-LIV.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2 (6) Lectures.—Cicero, De Amicitia, Shuckburgh,
Macmillan's Elementary Classics; Horace, Selected Odes,
Wickham, Clarendon Press. Classics 123
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece
and Rome, Dent, Chap. XXXII-LIV.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Composition.—Bradley's Arnold's Latin Prose Composition, Longmans, to Exercise 48.
All students are expected to provide themselves with
Allen and Greenough, New Latin Grammar.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2 (a) and 2 (6) are alternate courses; students intending to read for Honours in the Third and Fourth years are
expected, and students intending to offer Latin as a subject in the Education course, are advised to take Latin 2
(6).
3. Lectures.—Terence, Phormio, Bond and Walpole,
Macmillan; Virgil, Bucolics and Georgics, Page, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
4. Lectures.—Horace, Epistles, Wilkins, Macmillan;
Caesar, De Bello Gallico, T. Rice Holmes, Clarendon.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Juvenal, Satires, Duff, Cambridge; Seneca, Select Letters, Summers, Macmillan.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years)
6. Lectures.—Cicero, Select Letters, Watson (revised
by How), Clarendon; Garrod, Oxford Book of Latin Verse
(selections), Oxford.
Summer Readings   (with examination at the opening
of the session).—Duff, Literary History of Rome.
This course is open only to Honour Students.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
7. Lectures.—Roman History from 133 B.C. to 180
A.D. 124 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-books: A Short History of the Roman Republic,
Heitland, Cambridge; A short History of the Roman Empire, Wells and Barrow, Methuen.
A knowledge of Latin is not prerequisite for this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to
be taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
One lecture a week;  individual conferences.    I  unit.
9. Methods in High School Latin. Spring term only.
This course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher
Training Course, and does not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.
Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science
Professor: H. F. Angus.
Professor: W. A. Carrothers.
Associate Professor: J. Friend Day.
Associate Professor: C. W. Topping.
Assistant Professor: G. F. Drummond.
Lecturer in Accountancy: Frederick Field.
Honorary Lecturers:
J. Howard T. Falk.
Laura Holland, Cert. School of Social Work (Simmons College)
Part-time lecturer (Social Service Course).
Mary McPhedran, Diploma, Social Service Department (Toronto)
Part-time lecturer (Social Service Course).
Edna Pearce, B.S. (Knox, Illinois) Supervisor of Field Work
(Social Service Course).
Economics
1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of
general economic theory, including a survey of the principles of value, prices, money and banking, international
trade, tariffs, monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of railways and trusts, etc.
Deibler, Principles of Economics.   McGraw-Hill; Can-'
nan, Wealth, Routledge; The Canada Year Book, 1932.
Additional readings will be assigned for students offer- Economics 125
ing this course for credit in the Third or Fourth Year.
Economics 1 is the prerequisite for all other courses
in Economics, but may be taken concurrently with Economics 2.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2. Economic History.—A survey of the factors of economic significance from earliest recorded times, leading to
consideration of the more important phases of European
organisation, with special reference to the Industrial Revolution, the progress of agriculture, and resultant social conditions.
Knight, Barnes and Flugel, Economic History of Europe,
Houghton Mifflin; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Day. 3 units.
3. Labour Problems and Social Reform.—A study of
the rise of the factory system and capitalistic production,
and of the more important phases of trade unionism in England, Canada, and the United States. A critical analysis
of various solutions of the labour problem attempted and
proposed; profit-sharing, co-operation, arbitration and conciliation, scientific management, labour legislation and
socialism.
Furniss, Labor Problems, Houghton Mifflin. Simkho-
vitch, Marxism versus Socialism, Williams & Norgate; and
assigned readings.    Beveridge, Unemployment, Longmans.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Carrothers. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
4. Money and Banking.—The origin and development
of money. Banking principles and operations, laws of coinage, credit, price movements, foreign exchange. Banking
policy in the leading countries, with particular reference
to Canada.
Holdsworth, Money and Banking, Appleton. Edie,
Money, Bank Credit and Prices, Harpers; and assigned
readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Carrothers. 3 units. 126 Faculty of Arts and Science
5. Government Finance.—An outline course dealing with
the principles and methods of taxation, and administration
of public funds. Topics examined include; Growth of
taxation methods; theories of justice in taxation; classification, increase, economic effects, and control of expenditures; property, business, personal, commodity, and inheritance taxes, with reference to Canada, Britain and other
countries; the single tax; double taxation; shifting, incidence and economic effects of taxation; flotation, administration, conversion and redemption of government loans.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Carrothers. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
6. International Trade and Tariff Policy.—A survey of
the theory of international trade and the foreign exchanges;
the balance of trade, foreign investments and other fundamental factors: the problem of Reparations and of War
Debts; the protective tariff and commercial imperialism;
the commercial policy of the leading countries, with considerable attention to Canada.
Griffin, Principles of Foreign Trade, Macmillan. Fraser,
Foreign Trade and World Politics, A. A. Knopf. Taussig,
Selected Readings in International Trade and Tariff Problems, Ginn; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
7. Corporation Economics.—Historical development of
the different forms of industrial organization, including the
partnership, joint stock company and the corporation, and
the later developments, such as the pool, trust, combination,
and holding company. Methods of promotion and financing,
over-capitalization, stock market activities, the public policy
toward corporations, etc.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1932-33.) Economics 127
9. History of Economic Thought.—A study of the development of modern economic theory with special reference
to the Mercantilists; the Physiocrats; Adam Smith; the
Classical School and its critics; the Historical School; Jev-
ons, and Austrian School; Marshall; together with a study
of recent trends in economic thought.
Texts.—Gide and Rist, History of Economic Doctrines,
(Harrap) ; Cannan, Review of Economic Theory, (King) ;
Homan, Contemporary Economic Thought, Harpers) ; and
selected readings.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Carrothers. 3 units.
(This may be made a Reading Course in 1932-33)
11. Transportation.—A comprehensive study of the fundamentals of railroad development and organisation, with
the legal and economic problems involved; theory and practice of rate-making; discriminations; factors in public control; etc.
Acworth, Elements of Railway Economics, Clarendon
Press,  Oxford.    Jackman, Economics  of Transportation,
University of Toronto Press; and assigned readings.
(Not given in 1932-33.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
12. Statistics 1.—Statistical methods in relation to economic and social investigations. Statistical groups; types
of average. Statistical series in time; trend and fluctuation.
Index numbers. Methods of measuring correlation. Elementary probabilities and the normal curve of error. Problem of sampling.
Mills, F. C, Statistical Methods, Mills, F. C. and Davenport, D. H., A Manual of Problems and Tables in Statistics,
Henry Holt and Company.
References.—Bowley, Elements of Statistics; Chaddock,
Principles and Methods of Statistics; Crum and Patton,
Economic Statistics; Lovitt and Holtzclan, Statistics; Sec-
rist, An Introduction to Statistical Methods; Yule, Introduction to the Theory of Statistics; King, Elements of Statistical Method. 128 Faculty of Arts and Science
Prerequisite:—Mathematics 3.
One lecture and two hours laboratory a week     3 units.
13. Statistics 2.—This course is a continuation of Statistics 1 and aims at giving an understanding of statistical
technique in its application to problems of business and
economic research. It involves a study of more advanced
methods of correlation analysis, cyclical fluctuations and
business forecasting. In addition to covering a wide course
of reading students will be required to construct tables,
diagrams, etc., based on original data (official or private)
of the statistics of trade, production, sales, prices, wages,
etc., and to write reports and precis.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Drummond. 3 units.
Courses Open Only to Candidates for the Degree
of B.Com
14. Accountancy 1.—An introductory course to give a
broad perspective of accounting principles and methods, and
to promote an intelligent appreciation of business transactions in their relation to the balance sheet and income
account.
Assigned readings.
Prerequisites:—Economics 2, Geography 5, Mathematics
3.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Day. 3 units.
15. Accountancy 2.—More advanced work in connection
with the accounting and financial problems of corporations,
including liquidations and consolidations, and the miscellaneous details connected therewith.
Prerequisite:—Accountancy 1.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Field. 3 units.
16. Accountancy 3.—A study of the principles involved
in cost accounting, including the practical working through
a model set of accounts, and a consideration of the managerial use of cost records. Economics 129
Prerequisite:—Accountancy 1.
Three hours a week.       - 3 unitb
(Not given in 1932-33.)
17. Commercial Law 1.—The formation, operation, construction and discharge of contracts; bills of exchange,
promissory notes and cheques; company law; principal and
agent; the Bank Act; sales of goods.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
18. Commercial Law 2.—Bankruptcy; mortgages and
liens; trusts; partnership; certain principles in the law of
real property and landlord and tenant.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1932-33.)
19. Marketing and Problems in Sales Management.—
A detailed study of marketing functions, leading up to the
analysis of problems which have to be solved by sales executives.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Day. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
Agricultural Economics
1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the
agricultural problem; and some special topics, such as the
agricultural surplus, production in relation to population
growth, the farm income, and the share of Agriculture in
the national income.
Taylor,Agricultural Economics, Macmillan.
References and assigned readings from Gray, Carver,
Nourse and others.
Three lectures a week.   Mr. Clement. 3 units.
2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied
to the individual farm and to Agriculture as a whole. The
general principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national
Farmer Movements, co-operative marketing as illustrated
by the marketing of wheat, fruit and milk in Canada. 130 Faculty of Arts and Science
Hibbard, Marketing Agricultural Products, Appleton;
Mackintosh, Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada,
Ryerson Press, Toronto; references and assigned readings
from Macklin, Boyle, Benton, Black, Patton and others.
Three lectures a week.    Mr. Clement. 3 units.
Government
1. Constitutional Government.—This course deals with
the nature, origin, and aims of the State; and with the organization of government in the British Empire, the United
States of America, France and Germany.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Angus. 3 units.
2. Introduction to the Study of Law.— (a) A rapid survey of Legal History,    (b) Outlines of Jurisprudence.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Angus. 3 units.
3. Imperial Problems.—A course on problems of government within the British Empire.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Not given in 1932-33.)
4. Problems of the Pacific.—A course on the problems of
the Pacific Area discussed at the Conference of the Institute
of Pacific Relations in 1929, or likely to be discussed at the
conference to be held in 1931. Each problem will be related
to its economic and political background.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Not given in 1932-33)
Sociology
1. Principles of Sociology.—The approach to the study of
society is by way of the local community and its institutions.
An evaluation of the importance of the geographic, the biological, the psychological, and the cultural factors in the
determination of the rise, growth, and functioning of groups Economics 131
will be undertaken. There will be an attempt to discover
fundamental principles and to trace these principles in
their interrelationships. Several of the problems resulting
from group contacts will be studied.
Texts: Dawson-Gettys, Introduction to Sociology, Ronald ; Lumley, Principles of Sociology, McGraw-Hill.
References: Davis, Barnes, Introduction to Sociology,
Readings in Sociology; Park and Burgess, Introduction to
the Science of Sociology; Sumner and Keller, Science of
Society.
Economics 1 is a prerequisite to this course but may be
taken concurrently with it. In the case of students in Nursing who cannot take both courses this rule may be waived.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Topping. 3 units.
2. Social Origins and Development.—The different views
relating to the origin and evolution of human society; the
geographic factor and economic methods in their bearing
upon social life; primitive mental attitudes; the development of ethical, etc., ideas among primitive peoples; primitive institutions, tools, art, and their modern forms: the
growth of cardinal social ideas through the ancient and
classical period to the present time.
Text: Wallis, Introduction to Anthropology, Harper.
References: Baitsell, The Evolution of Man; Osborn,
Men of the Old Stone Age; Goldenweiser, Early Civilization;
Thomas, A Source Book of Social Origins; Boas, The Mind
of Primitive Man; Lowie, Primitive Society; Wissler, Man
and Culture; Ogburn, Social Change.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Topping. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
3. The Urban Community.—The structural characteristics of the modern city will be outlined and the sociological significance of the functions performed by its inhabitants discussed. A factual study will be made of urban personalities, groups, and cultural patterns. Methods of urban
social control will be investigated and solutions for urban
problems will be evaluated. 132 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text: Anderson, Lindeman, Urban Sociology, Knopf,
1928.
References: Bedford, Readings in Urban Sociology;
Burgess (ed.), The Urban Community; Park and Burgess,
The City; Lynd, Middletown; Zorbaugh, Gold Coast and
Slum; Shaw, Urban Delinquency Areas; A Plan for the
City of Vancouver.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Topping. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
Courses Open Only to Candidates for the Diploma
of Social Service
Note:   A student must be of the full age of Twenty-
one years for admission to any of these courses.
1. Introduction to Social Service. — An introductory
course in which is presented a general view of the entire
field of social service as illustrated by its present scope and
methods. ^ ^
Two hours a week.    Mr. Topping. 2 units.
2. Social Organization and Case Work Methods.—An
introductory course in which the general principles of the
social treatment of unadjusted individuals and disorganized
families are elucidated.
One hour a week.    Miss McPhedran. 1  unit.
3. Child Welfare.—An introductory course in which
methods of caring for dependent, neglected, and delinquent
children are presented and discussed.
One hour a week.   Miss Holland. 1 unit.
4. Personal Hygiene.—An introductory course in which
basic facts concerning physiological processes, infection,
immunity and the more common diseases, as related to the
task of the social worker, are presented.
One hour a week.      Miss Kerr. 1 unit.
5. Case Work Methods.—Selected case records which
present complex or difficult situations are studied with a
view to determining the principles of diagnosis and treatment involved.
One hour a week.    Miss McPhedran. 1 unit. Education 133
6 (a) Child Welfare Case Studies. — An intensive
study of the records of a child welfare organization will
be undertaken. Field work to supplement the lectures is
arranged for in a child welfare agency.
One hour a week.    Miss Holland. 1  unit.
(b) Administration.   One hour a week.    Mr. Falk.
1 unit.
7. Group Work.—The principles underlying community organization and group organization are established by
a study of case records and through the working out of
projects. Field work is arranged to supplement the lectures
and discussions.
One hour a week.    Miss Pearce. 1 unit.
8. Public Health.—Such an understanding of the work
of the chief public and private health agencies will be given
as will encourage intelligent co-operation on the part of
the social worker with these agencies.
One hour a week.   (Not given in 1932-33.) 1 unit.
9 and 10. Field Work Seminar.—The problems met by
the students in connection with field work are discussed as
well as certain other selected problems. The object of the
seminar is to unify and integrate the whole course.
One hour a week.   Mr. Topping, Miss Pearce.
1 unit each session.
Department of Education
Professor: G. M. Weir.
Associate Professor: Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
Associate Professor: W. G. Black.
Special Lecturer:  H. T. J. Coleman.
Instructor in Physical Education:
Lecturers in High School Methods: The following professors: R.
H. Clark, A. C. Cooke, J. G. Davidson, Janet T. Greig, A. H.
Hutchinson, L. Richardson. L. Robertson, G. G. Sedgewick,
also C. H. Scott of the Vancouver School staff.
Lecturers in Elementary School Methods:  ..	
Lecturer in Junior High School Organization and Administration:
Undergraduates who intend to register in the Teacher
Training Course are advised to take at least three units
in Education for credit towards the B.A. degree. 134 Faculty of Arts and Science
1. Introduction to the Study of Education.—This course
is intended to serve as a broad preparation for subsequent
graduate courses. The following topics will be studied:
The needs of society and of the individual; general and
specific objectives; educative agencies; the institutions of
our public school system; school law; school finance;
school sites and buildings; administration and supervision
of schools; problems of classification and promotion; curricula; educational and vocational guidance; special rural
and urban problems; recent developments in Europe,
Canada, and U. S. A.; the development of the science of
education.
References: Chapman and Counts, Principles of Education, Houghton Mifflin; Cubberley, Introduction to the
Study of Education, Houghton Mifflin; Smith, Principles
of Educational Sociology, Houghton Mifflin; Clapp, Chase
and Merriman, Introduction to Education, Ginn and Co.;
Clement, Principles and Practices of Secondary Education, Century Co.; Douglass, Secondary Education, Houghton Mifflin; Ferris, Secondary Education in Country and
Village, Appleton; The British Columbia School Survey;
Readings from Yearbooks and Educational Journals.
3 units.
2. Elementary Educational Psychology.—An introductory survey of the field of psychology as applied to education; inherited human characteristics; individual differences; control of environment; adaptation to environment; types of learning; efficiency in learning; the laws
involved in certain accepted methods of teaching; motivation; intelligent behaviour; habits and their development;
transfer of training; infancy; childhood; adolescence;
character and personality; educational psychology as a
science.
References: Judd, Psychology of Secondary Education,
Ginn; Sandiford, Educational Psychology, Longmans Green;
Jones, Principles of Guidance, McGraw-Hill; Douglass,
Modern Methods in High School Teaching, Houghton Mif- Education 135
flin; Pintner, Educational Psychology, Holt; Mueller, Teaching in Secondary Schools, Century; Starch, Educational
Psychology, (Revised Edition), Macmillan; Brooks, The
Psychology of Adolescence, Houghton Mifflin; Skinner,
Gast and Skinner, Readings in Educational Psychology,
Appleton. (Not offered in 1932-33.) 3 units.
3. History and Principles of Education.—The meaning
and philosophic basis of education will be approached through a study of the educational theories, practices, and institutions of the classical, mediaeval, and modern periods.
Special attention will be given to developments in Education during the Nineteenth and Twentieth Centuries in
Canada, United States, Great Britain, France, and Germany.
Text-book: Kandel, History of Secondary Education,
Houghton Mifflin. 3 units.
(Not offered in 1932-33.)
Note : Courses in Education for undergraduates in Arts
of the Third and Fourth Years are preparatory to the
Teacher Training Course, and do not exempt candidates
from any of the work prescribed for the latter course.
The following conditions apply to courses in Education:
(a) Not more than six units in Education may be taken
for credit towards the B. A. degree.
(b) An undergraduate with special qualifications may
(on the recommendation of the Faculty) be allowed
to substitute an advanced course in Education, of
similar content, for one of the courses mentioned
above.
(c) Until the work of the First and Second Years has
been completed, courses in Education are not open
(for credit)  to undergraduates.
(d) Philosophy 7 and 9 will be accepted as prerequisites for a minor in Education for the M.A. degree,
if these subjects have not already been counted
as prerequisites towards a major or a minor in
Philosophy. 136 Faculty of Arts and Science
Courses Open Only to Students in the
Teacher Training Course
A. Courses given throughout the University Session:
(1) Educational Psychology
Texts: Gates, Psychology for Students of Education,
(Revised Edition), Macmillan.
References: Garrett, Great Experiments in Psychology,
Century Co.; Pillsbury, Education as a Psychologist Sees
It, Macmillan; Thomson, Instinct, Intelligence, and Character, Longmans; Burnham, The Normal Mind, Apnleton;
Brooks, Psychology of Adolescence, Houghton Mifflin;
Schoen, Human Nature, Harpers.
Prerequisite: Philosophy 1.
(2) School Administration and Law
Texts: Sears, Classroom Organization and Control
(Revised Edition), Houghton Mifflin. Manual of School
Law of British Columbia; Foster, High School Administration, The Century Co.
References: Reeder, The Fundamentals of Public School
Administration, Macmillan; Cubberley, Public School Administration, Houghton Mifflin; Cubberley, The Principal
and His School, Houghton Mifflin; Perry, The Management
of a City School, Macmillan (Revised Edition) ; Davis,
Junior High School Education, World Book Company;
Johnson, Administration and Supervision of the High
School, Ginn & Co.; Report of the School Survey Commission of British Columbia; Fifth Year Book of the Department of Superintendence; Assigned readings.
(3) History and Principles of Education:
(a) Educational leaders and movements, with special
reference to the period since 1800.
(b) Educational systems:Canada, with special reference to British Columbia; England; France;
Germany; the United States.
Text-book: Kandel, History of Secondary Education,
Houghton Mifflin. Education 137
References: Chapman and Counts, Principles of Education, Houghton Mifflin; Cubberley, A Brief History of
Education, Houghton Mifflin; Reisner, Historical Foundations of Modern Education, Macmillan; Cubberley, Readings in the History of Education, Houghton Mifflin; Boyd,
The History of Western Education, Black; Graves, Great
Educators of Three Centuries, Macmillan; Yearbooks of the
International Institute of Teachers' College; Roman, The
New Education in Europe, Dutton; Reisner, Nationalism
and Education Since 1789, Macmillan; Reisner, The Evolution of the Common School, Macmillan; Birchenough,
History of Elementary Education in England and Wales,
University Tutorial Press; Balfour, Educational Systems of
Great Britain and Ireland, Oxford; Kandel, Twenty-five
Years of American Education, Macmillan.
(4) Interpretation  and   Construction   of  Educational
Tests and Measurements.
References: Pintner, Intelligence Testing, Holt; Monroe, DeVoss and Kelly, Educational Measurements, Houghton Mifflin; Williams, Graphic Methods in Education,
Houghton Mifflin; Otis, Statistical Measurement, World
Book Co.; Ruch, Improvement of the Written Examination, Scott, Foresman & Co.; Ruch and Stoddard, Tests and
Measurements in High School Instruction, World Book Co.;
Odell, Traditional Examinations and New Type Tests, Century Co.; Orleans and Seales, Objective Tests, World Book
Co.
The above courses are obligatory for all students.
B.   Courses given during the First Term only:
(1) Psychology of the Elementary School Subjects.
Texts: Reed, Psychology of Elementary School Subjects, Ginn & Co.; Stone, Silent and Oral Reading, Houghton Mifflin; Jordan, Educational Psychology, Holt.
References: Freeman, Psychology of the Common Branches, Houghton Mifflin; Stormzand, Progressive Methods
of Teaching, Houghton Mifflin; Charters, Teaching the Com- 138 Faculty of Arts and Science
mon Branches, Houghton Mifflin; Holley, Modern Principles and the Elementary Teacher's Technique, Century Co.
Assigned readings from Year Books and Educational
Journals.
(Obligatory for all students.)
(2) Methods in Elementary School Subjects: Art,
Music, Writing, Primary Grade Activities.
Assigned readings.
One hour a week for each of these methods courses.
(3) Junior High School Organization and Administration:
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week.
(Candidates will select at least three hours of work a
week from (2) and (3) above.)
C. Courses given during the Second Term only.
(1) Methods in High School Subjects:
Texts: Judd, Psychology of Secondary Education, Ginn
& Co.; Mueller, Teaching in Secondary Schools, Century Co.
References: Douglass, Modern Methods in High School
Teaching, Houghton Mifflin Co.; Millis, The Teaching of
High School Subjects, Century Co.
Assigned readings.
(2) Methods Courses in the following high school subjects are offered: English, History, Latin, French, Mathematics, Biology, Physics, Chemistry, Art, Physical Education. Two courses are obligatory (for teaching and examination purposes), while one course may be attended as an
auditor.    Nine hours a week.
5. Observation Assignments and Practice Teaching.
(1) First Term: At least forty (40) hours in the
elementary schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students.
(2) Second Term: At least sixty (60) hours in
the high schools of the Province. Obligatory
for all students. English 139
Department of English
Professor: G. G. Sedgewick.
Professor: W. L. MacDonald.
Associate Professor: F. G. C. Wood.
Associate Professor:  Thorleif Larsen.
Associate Professor: F. C. Walker.
Assistant Professor: M. L. Bollert.
Assistant Professor: II. C. Lewis.
First Year
1. (a) Literature.—Elementary study of a number of
literary forms to be chosen from the short story, the play,
the novel, the essay, the simpler sorts of poetry.
Texts for 1931-32: A book of short stories to be selected.
Euripides, Bacchae, in Gilbert Murray's paraphrase. Shakespeare, Julius Caesar. Sheridan, The School for Scandal,
Everyman. Ibsen, The Doll's House, Everyman. Monro,
Twentieth Century Poetry, Chatto and Windus.
Two hours a week. \
(b) Composition.—Elementary forms and principles of composition.
Text-books to be selected.
Two hours a week. 3 units.
The work in composition consists of (i) themes and
class exercises, and (ii) of written examinations. Students
will be required to make a passing mark in each of these two
parts of the work.
Second Year
2. Literature.—Studies in the history of English Literature.
Lectures and texts illustrative of the chief authors and
movements from Tottel's Miscellany to Shelley. Reynolds,
English Literature in Fact and Story, The Century Co.
Three hours a week. 3 units. 140 Faculty of Arts and Schsnce
Third and Fourth Years
9. Shakspere.—This course may be taken for credit in
two successive years. In 1932-33, 9 (b) will be given as
follows:
i. A detailed study of the text of A Midsummer
Night's Dream, Henry IV, Part 1, Othello,
Anthony and Cleopatra, A Winter's Tale.
ii. Lecures on Shakespeare's development, on his
use of sources, and on his relation to the stage
and the dramatic practice of his time.
Students will provide themselves with annotated editions
of the five plays named above, and with The Facts about
Shakespeare, by Neilson and Thorndike, Macmillan. They
are advised to get the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson,
or the Oxford Shakespeare, ed. Craig.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Sedgewick. 3  units.
9. (a)   (Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
10. The Drama to 16U2.—The course begins with a study
of the Theban plays of Sophocles and of Aristotle's Theory
of Tragedy. The main subject of the course is Elizabethan
Drama: (1) its beginnings in the Miracle and Morality
Plays and in the Interludes; (2) its development in Shakespeare's predecessors—Lyly, Peele, Greene, Kyd and Marlowe; (3) its culmination in Shakespeare; (4) and its decline in Jonson, Beaumont and Fletcher, Middleton, Webster,
Massinger, Shirley and Ford.
Texts: Lewis Campbell, Sophocles in English Verse,
World's Classics, Oxford. Everyman and Other Interludes,
Dent. Chief Elizabethan Dramatists, ed. Neilson, Houghton
Mifflin; Shakespeare, ed. Craig, Oxford, or the Cambridge
Shakespeare, ed. Neilson, Houghton Mifflin.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Larsen. 3 units.
13. The English Novel from Richardson to the Present
Time.—The development of English fiction will be traced English 141
from Richardson, Fielding, Smollett, and Sterne through
Goldsmith, Mrs. Radcliffe, Jane Austen, Scott, C. Bronte,
Dickens, Thackeray, and George Eliot to Trollope, Meredith,
Stevenson, Hardy and a few representative novelists now
living.
A fair knowledge of the works of Jane Austen, Scott,
Dickens, Thackeray and George Eliot is a prerequisite
for those taking this course.
Three hours a week.    Mr, Wood. 3 units.
14. Eighteenth Century Literature.—This course aims
to give a view, as comprehensive as possible, of the main
currents of English thought and literature during the period
1660-1800. It is mainly concerned with the work of such
men as Dryden, Pope, Swift, Addison, Steele, Johnson,
Goldsmith, Burke and Burns.
Three hours a week.    Mr. MacDonald. 3 units.
16. Romantic Poetry. 1780 to 1830.—Studies in the beginnings and progress of Romanticism, based chiefly on the
work of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, Shelley,
Scott.
Text: Bernbaum, Guide Through the Romantic Movement.
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature,
1780-1830.
Three hours a week.    Mr .Walker. 3 units.
19. Contemporary Literature.—Some tendencies of
English Literature of the present generation, in poetry
and the essay and the novel, will be studied in this course.
Texts: Brown, Essays of Our Times, Scott, Foresman
Company. Sanders and Nelson, Chief Modern Poets, Macmillan Company.   Three novels, to be assigned.
Students intending to take this course should secure
copies of the list for summer reading, from the Registrar's
office, as soon as possible. If they desire, students can arrange with the Library to have books sent to them during
the Summer vacation.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Lewis. 3 units. 142 Faculty of Arts and Science
25 (a) Private Reading.—Students who are candidates
for an Honours degree in English may elect a course of
private reading in their Third Year. 3 units.
25 (b) Private Reading.—Students of the Fourth Year
may pursue, with the consent and under the direction of
the Department, a course of private reading.       3 units.
In such courses examinations will be set, but no class
instruction will be given.
20. Chaucer and Middle English.— (a) Middle English
grammar with the reading of representative texts. (6)
The Canterbury Tales.
Texts: A Middle English reader. The Oxford Chaucer,
ed. Skeat.   Manly, The Canterbury Tales, Holt.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
21a. Anglo-Saxon.—Moore & Knott, The Elements of
Old English, George Wahr. Bright, Anglo-Saxon Reader,
Holt.
Two hours a week.    Mr. Walker. 2 units.
21b. Anglo-Saxon.—Beowulf.
Two hours a week.   Second Term.   Mr. Walker.     1 unit.
22. Studies in Linguistic History. — Origins, growth,
and development of the English language. A brief introduction to Germanic philology; the Indo-European language
group; Grimm's Law; the Anglo-Saxon period; Norman,
French, and Latin influences; study of the gradual evolution of forms, sounds and meanings.
Two hours a week.   First Term.   Mr. Walker.     1 unit.
24. Seminar.—In this class advanced students will get
practice in some of the simpler methods of criticism and
investigation. The subject for 1932-33 will be announced
at the beginning of the session.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Larsen. 2 units
Teacher Training Course
26. Methods in High School English.—This course does
not carry undergraduate credit.
Three hours a week.   Second Term.   Mr. Sedgewick. Geology 143
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock.
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaentology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology: T. C. Phemister.
Assistant:  —
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to the science of Geology. The following subjects are
treated in the lectures and laboratory.
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, the wor!
of the wind, ground water, streams, glaciers, the ocean
and its work, the structure of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous intrusions, metamorphism, mountains
and plateaus, and ore-deposits.
Two lectures a week.    First Term.   Mr. Williams.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, includ-
ing^the study and identification of the most common minerals
and rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and the study of structures by the use of models.
Two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Schofield and Mr.
and Mr. Williams.
(c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the
Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and
Quaternary eras.
Two lectures a week, Second Term.   Mr. Williams.
(d) Laboratory Excersises in Historical Geology, consisting of the general study of fossils, their characteristics
and associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated by their occurrence in the strata. The principles of
Palaeogeography will be taken up and illustrated by the
study of palaeogeography of North America.
Two hours laboratory a week. Second Term. Mr. Williams
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will
take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate
neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject
matter of the lectures. 144 Faculty of Arts and Science
Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or
Chemistry 1 or Physics 1, taken either before or concurrently.
Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Foundations of Geology, Wiley.
Reference books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill,
Rocks, Rock-Weathering and Soils. Coleman and Parks,
Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study
of Fossils. Davis, Geographical Essays. Hugh Miller's
works.
Students will be required to make a passing mark in
each of the above subdivisions. 3  units.
2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field
of Mineralogy. ^
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1)
Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive Mineralogy of 40 of the most common mineral
species, with special reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common
crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied
by a brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by
Ford, Wiley. I
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week.   First
Term.    Mr. Phemister. iy2 units.
2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy.—
This course supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical
Mineralogy, with a critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by
Ford, Wiley. Geology 145
Prerequisite: Geology 2  (a)
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Second
Term.   Mr. Phemister. li/2 units.
4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults,
flowage, structures common to both fracture and flow,
mountains, major units of structure, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special
reference to the physiography of British Columbia.
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, 2nd Ed., Holt.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Schofield. 3 units.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study
of the earth and the development of the geological sciences.
Mr. Brock.
(6) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams,
Mr. Schofield, Mr.Brock.J
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of
the continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and
their influences upon life.   Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures and one hour laboratory a week.    3 units.
6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both geological and geographical.
Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North America
Index Fossils.   Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. Mr.
Williams. 3 units.
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies
of (i) optical mineralogy and (ii) petrography, with an
introduction to petrogenesis.
The laboratory work deals with the determination of
rocks, first under the microscope and then in hand specimen. 146 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-books: Harker, Petrology for Students, Cambridge
University Press. Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of Rock-forming Minerals and Rocks,
University of Chicago Press. Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley.
Reference works: Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic
Methods. Rosenbusch, Microscopical Physiography of the
Rock-making Minerals, translated by Iddings. Rosenbusch,
Elemente der Gesteinslehre, Grubenmann, Die Kristal-
linen Schiefer.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of 2 hours a
week.    Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis, and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic
mineral deposits with type illustrations; and a description
of the ore deposits of the British Empire, special stress
being placed on those in Canada.
Text-book: Ries, Economic Geology (6th edition),
Wiley.
Reference books: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits (3rd edition), Emmons, General Economic Geology and Principles
of Economic Geology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or
accompany this course.
Four hours a week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr.
Schofield, Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course
dealing with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding
and polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training
in microchemical methods of mineral determination.
During the second term each student is assigned a suite
of ores from some mining district for a critical examination and report. Geology 147
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany this course.
Two hours laboratory a week. Mr. Schofield and Mr.
Phemister. 1 unit.
10. Field Geology.—The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the
officers of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is
essentially practical, and is designed to teach methods of
observing, recording and correlating geological facts in
the field. The students construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of Vancouver which require the
use of the various methods and instruments employed in
field geology.
Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken,
must be taken concurrently.
Three hours a week.      Mr. Schofield. iy2 units.
12. Meteorology and Climatology.—A course covering in
a general way the whole field, with practice in using instruments, constructing and using weather charts, and weather
predicting.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours a
week.    Second Term.    Mr. Schofield iy2 units.
14. Crystallography.—This course consists of a systematic study of the morphology of crystals, with an introduction to mathematical crystallography.
The practical work deals with the measurement of
crystals and, in the case of students in chemistry, a certain
number of the crystals measured will be grown in the laboratory.
Students are advised to consult with the instructor before registering for this course. 148 Faculty of Arts and Science
Text-book: Tutton, Crystallography and Practical Crystal Measurement, Macmillan.
Two lectures and six or eight hours laboratory work a
week.   Mr. Phemister.
5 or 6 units, dependent on amount of laboratory work.
Geography
1. Principles of Geography.—This introductory course
aims to develop in the student the point of view of modern
geography and to furnish a foundation or background
that will be useful not alone to those who may intend to
continue a study of geography or to teach it in the schools
but also to those who intend to study history, economics
and other subjects, or to enter business or professional
careers, into which geographical considerations enter.
Since geography is a study of the surface of the earth
and its relation to life, particularly to human life, physical
geography (fairly well covered by the prescribed textbook) must be mastered. The second fundamental is a
study of man, to which the lectures are to a large extent
devoted. The characteristics of man and the influence of
geographical environment are most easily discerned in
primitive societies; consequently these are examined in
some detail. From these as a starting point the relationships between man and his environment in complex western civilization is investigated.
A knowledge of the main facts in the geography of
Canada is assumed so that if the student is not already
familiar with them he must become so by private study,
for he is expected to be able to give the principles brought
out in class work Canadian applications and to be able to
furnish Canadian illustrations.
Text-book: Peattie, New College Geography, Ginn &
Co.
An Atlas—failing a large comprehensive atlas, one of
following cheap ones will serve:   Philip's  Senior  School History 149
Atlas, Geo. Philip & Son; Canadian School Atlas, J. M.
Dent; Goode's School Atlas, Rand McNally Co.
Reference Books: Jones and Bryan, North America.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Brock. 3 units.
5. Economic Geography.—A general survey of the principal resources and industries of the world, with emphasis
on those entering into international trade, leading to a study
of the principles and problems of transportation by sea.
MacFarlane, Economic Geography, latest edition, Pitman; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Day. 3 units.
Department of History
Professor: 	
Professor: W. N. Sage.
Associate Professor: F. H. Soward.
Assistant Professor: A. C. Cooke.
Students who intend to specialize in History are advised
to study one or more modern languages. A reading knowledge of French, at least, will be required for Honours.
First and Second Years
1. Main Currents in Modern History.—Intended primarily for First Year students and dealing with the folow-
ing subjects: The waning of the Middle Ages; Consolidation of Monarchy in France, Spain and England; the Peace
of Westphalia and the Emergence of the European States
System; the Balance of Power; Rise of Russia and Prussia;
the Revolutionary and Napoleonic Era; the Industrial Revolution ; Growth of Democracy and Nationality; the Eastern
Question; Expansion of Europe; the Awakening of the
Far East; Armed Peace (1870-1914); World War; the
Russian Revolution; the League of Nations and Post-war
Problems.
Text-books: Hyma, Europe from the Renaissance to
1815; Higby, History of Europe (1492-1815) ; Schapiro,
Modern and Contemporary European History. 150 Faculty of Arts and Science
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Soward 3 units.
2. (a) Outlines of Canadian History.—Discovery and
exploration; geographic and institutional background of
French and English colonies: relations with the Indians in
the fur-trade; conflict and British supremacy; French and
British in Canada; effects of American Revolution; representative institutions; achievement of Responsible Government; Confederation; Canadian-American relations; Imperial relations; in the stream of world politics; growth of
literature and the arts.
(6) The History of British Columbia.—Early explorations of Spaniards and Russians; Captains Cook and Vancouver ; Maritime Fur-trade; Mackenzie, Fraser, Thompson;
North-West Company in New Caledonia; Hudson's Bay
Company in "Old Oregon;" Colonies of Vancouver Island
and British Columbia; Gold Rush of 1858; work of the Royal
Engineers; Cariboo; Confederation; development of the Province of British Columbia.
Text-books: Lucas and Egerton, A Historical Geography
of Canada, Parts I and II; Skelton, The Canadian Dominion;
Newbigin, Canada; Borden, Canadian Constitutional Studies; Howay, British Columbia, the Making of a Province;
Sage, Sir James Douglas and British Columbia; Sage, Outline of British Columbia History.
Reading and reference: Eastman, Church and State in
Neiv France; Brebner, Acadia, New England's Outpost;
Abbe Groulx, La Naissance d'une Race; Chapais, Cours d'
histoire; Egerton, History of Canada; Trotter, Canadian
Federation; Keenleyside, Canada and the United States;
Howay and Scholefield, British Columbia, Vols. I and II;
Denton, The Far West Coast; The Makers of Canada; Canada and Its Provinces; Cambridge History of the British
Empire, Vol. VI.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1932-33) History 151
4. Mediaeval History.—A sketch of Mediaeval History
from the Council of Nicaea to the Fall of Constantinople.
The following subjects Will be discussed: The triumph of
Christianity; the breakdown of the Western Roman Empire,
the Barbarian Invasions; the earlier monastic movements;
Mohammed and Islam; the rise of the Papacy; the Franks
and Charlemagne; the struggle between Empire and Papacy ; the Normans in Europe; the Crusades; the Mediaeval
Towns; the later monastic movements; the rise of the
Universities; Frederick II; the later Mediaeval Empire;
the national kingdoms in France, Spain and England; the
Turks and the Byzantine Empire.
Text-books: Thompson, History of the Middle Ages;
Munro and Sontag, The Middle Ages.
Additional reading: Sellery and Krey, Mediaeval Foundations of Western Civilization; Thorndike, A History of
Mediaeval Europe; Oman, The Dark Ages; Tout, Empire
and Papacy; Lodge, The Close of the Middle Ages; Bryce,
The Holy Roman Empire; Crump and Jacob, The Legacy
of the Middle Ages, i
This course is intended primarily for Second Year Students who hope to specialize in history.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Sage. 3 units.
Third and Fourth Years
History 10,11,12, 13 and 14 are intended for Third Year
students; History 15, 19 and 20 for Fourth Year. History
10 must be taken by all candidates for Honours.
All Honours students (whether in History alone or in
a combined course) must take the History Seminars in
their Third and Fourth Years. The Seminar is offered
as a training in intensive work and carries no credits.
If the graduating essay be written in History it will
count as 3 units.
10. British History to the Revolution of 1688.—The geographic factors; Roman Britain; character and institutions 152 Faculty of Arts and Science
of the Anglo-Saxons; relations of Church and State; the
Norman Conquest and the Manorial System; royal supremacy under Normans and Angevins; the Great Charter; the
evolution of Parliament; social conditions in the 14th
century; the Lancastrian experiment; the Tudor Monarchy
and the middle class; the National Church; agrarian and
commercial development; struggle between King and Parliament; the Puritan Rebellion; the Commonwealth; the
Revolution Settlement; the beginnings of party and cabinet government.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Text-books: Trevelyan, A History of England; Davis,
England under the Normans and Angevins; Trevelyan,
England under the Stuarts.
Reading and Reference: Stubbs, Constitutional History
of England; McKechnie, Magna Charta; Pollard, The Evolution of Parliament; Attenborough, Laws of the Earliest
English Kings; Prothero Statutes and Constitutional Documents; Gardiner, Constitutional Documents of the Puritan
Revolution; Robertson, Select Statutes, Cases and Documents; Hunt and Poole (Ed.), The Political History of England; Oman (Ed.), A History of England.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Sage. 3 units.
11. British Expansion Overseas.—General aspects of the
expansion of Europe; the rise and fall of the First British
Empire; colonization of Australasia; Dutch and British in
South Africa; British North America; Responsible Government; Colonial and Imperial Conferences; India under
the Company and Crown; Indian Nationalism; Crown
Colonies, Chartered Companies; Protectorates, and Mandates; The British Commonwealth of Nations.
Essay subjects will be assigned throughout the session.
Text-books; Robinson, Development of the British Empire; or Muir, Short History of the British Commonwealth;
W. Y. Elliott, The New British Empire; Chirol, India. History 153
Reading and Reference: Williamson, Short History of
British Expansion; Cambridge History of the British Empire; Egerton, Origin and Growth of Greater Britain;
Keith, Responsible Government in the Dominions; Scott,
Short History of Australia; Hall, Empire to Commonwealth; Hancock, Australia; Marais, Colonization of New
Zealand; Scholefield, New Zealand in the Making; Lugard,
Dual Mandate in British Tropical Africa; Walker, History
of South Africa; Hofmeyr, South Africa.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
12. History of the United States of America.—This
course begins with a sketch of the American colonies at the
outbreak of the Revolution and traces the history of the
United States from the commencement of the War of
Independence to the close of the World War.
Text-books: Charles and Mary Beard, The Rise of American Civilisation; J. T. Adams, The Epic of America.
Reading and reference: Morison, Oxford History of the
United States; U. B. Phillips, Life and Labor in the Old
South; Turner, The Frontier in American History; Ling-
ley, Since the Civil War; Faulkner, American Economic
History; The American Nation Series; The Chronicles of
America; and the Histories by Rhodes and Channing; Hart,
American History as Told by Contemporaries; Flugel and
Faulkner, Readings in the Economic and Social History
of the United States.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Soward. 3 units.
13. The Age of the Renaissance and Reformation.—The
transition from the Mediaeval to the Modern world; the
fore-runners of the Renaissance, the Renaissance in Italy
and throughout Europe; the Reformation; the Counter-
reformation; the commercial revolution; the scientific
revolution; the peace of Westphalia.
Essay subjects will be announced throughout the session.
Text-books:    Hulme,   Renaissance   and   Reformation;
Smith, Age of the Reformation. 154 Faculty of Arts and Science
Reading and reference: Symonds, Renaissance in Italy;
Villari, Life and Times of Machiavelli; Merejkowski, Romance of Leonardo da Vinci; Smith, History of Modern Culture—The Great Awakening; Smith, Erasmus; McGiffert,
Martin Luther; Clark, The Seventeenth Century; Fraude,
Life and Letters of Erasmus; Mackinnon, Luther and the
Reformation; Pijoan, History of Art (iii) ; Michel, Histoire de I'Art (iii, iv) ; Schevill, First Century of Italian
Humanism; Hyma, Luther's Theological Development.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
14. The Age of Louis XIV; The Revolutionary and
Napoleonic Era.—The establishment of absolutism; its
strength, weaknesses, and decline; the converging movements of the 18th Century; the "philosophes"; the Revolution; Napoleon; the Congress of Vienna.
Essay subjects will be assigned throughout the session.
Text-books: Wakeman, The Ascendancy of France;
Palm, Establishment of French Absolutism; Gottschalk,
The Era oj/ the French Revolution; or Rose, The Revolutionary and Napoleonic Era.
Reading and reference: Lowell, The Eve of the French
Revolution; de Tocqueville, L'Ancien Regime; Young,
Travels in France; Rousseau, Social Contract; Burke,
Reflections on the French Revolution; Aulard, The
French Revolution; Madelin, The French Revolution; Made-
lin, The Revolutionaries; Mathiez, The French Revolution;
Sorel, L'Europe et la Revolution Francaise; Mahan, Influence of Sea Power on the French Revolution and Empire;
Legg, Select Documents of the French Revolution; Rose,
or Fournier, or Lacour-Gayet, Napoleon; Fisher, Bonapar-
tism.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
15. Europe, 1815-1919.—The political, social and economic history of the chief countries of continental Europe,
with especial attention to international relations.
Text-book: Hazen, Europe Since 1815. History 155
Additional reading required of Honours students: Gooch,
History of Modern Europe, 1878-1919; Fueter, World History, 1815-1920; Moon, Imperialism and World Politics;
Knight, Barnes and Flugel, Economic History of Europe in
Modern Times.
Reading and reference: Wright, The Geographical
Basis of European History; Marvin, The Century of Hope
and the Unity Series; Buell, International Relations; The
European volumes of the Modern World Series; Clapham,
Economic Development of France and Germany, 1815-1914;
Fay, The Origins of the World War; Dickinson, The International Anarchy; Redlich, Emperor Francis Joseph of
Austria; Thayer, Cavour; Ludwig, Bismarck; Simpson,
Louis Napoleon.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Not given in 1932-33.)
19. Great Britain Since 1688.—This course aims at an
interpretation of the constitutional, political, economic and
religious development of the British Isles since 1688.
Essay subjects will be arranged throughout the session.
Text-books: Grant Robertson, England Under the Hanoverians; Trevelyan, England in the Age of Queen Anne;
Fay, Great Britain from Adam Smith to the Present Day;
Trevelyan, British History in the Nineteenth Century.
Reading and reference: Wingfield-Stratford, The History of British Civilization; Dicey, Law and Opinion in
England; Cambridge History of British Foreign Policy;
Poole and Hunt, The Political History of England; Haltvy,
Volumes on Nineteenth Century England; Mantoux, The
Industrial Revolution; Williams, Life of Chatham; Guedal-
la, The Duke; Guedalla, Palmerston; Morley, Life of Gladstone; Moneypenny and Buckle, Life of Disraeli; Cecil,
Salisbury; Dibelius, England.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Sage. 3 units. 156 Faculty of Arts and Science
20. The Evolution of Canadian Self-Government.—A
survey of the period from the Peace of Utrecht to the present
day. The following subjects will be dealt with: French and
British Colonial Systems; British experience in Acadia;
British policy after the Treaty of Paris; the Quebec Act;
the effect of the American Revolution; the Constitutional
Act; the opening of the West; the War of 1812; the formation of parties and the struggle for Reform; Durham's Report; the achievement of Responsible Government; Confederation and the completion of the Dominion; the development of Responsible Government and the growth of nationhood.
Text-books: Martin, Empire and Commonwealth; Kennedy, The Constitution of Canada; Kennedy, Statutes,
Treaties and Documents of the Canadian Federation, 1713-
1929.
Reading and reference: Brady, Canada; Egerton and
Grant, Canadian Constitutional Development; Shortt and
Doughty, Constitutional Documents, 1759-1791; Doughty
and McArthur, Documents, 1791-1818; Oliver, The Canadian North-West; Durham, Report; New, Lord Durham;
Pope, Confederation Documents; Whelan, The Union of
the British Provinces; Confederation Debates; Chisholm,
Speeches and Public Letters of Joseph Howe; Keith, Responsible Government in the Dominions; Morison, British
Supremacy and Canadian Self-government; Toynbee, The
Conduct of British Empire Foreign Relations Since the
Peace Settlement; Corbett and Smith, Canada and World
Politics; Borden, Canada in the Commonwealth; Livingston, Responsible Government in Nova Scotia; The Makers
of Canada; Canada and Its Provinces.
E&says will be assigned throughout the Session.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Soward. 3 units.
21. Methods in High School History.—This course is
offered primarily  for  students  in  the  Teacher Training Mathematics 157
Course and  does not carry undergraduate credit.    Mr.
Cooke.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week in Spring term only.
Honours Seminars:
(a)  Third Year: Historical Method. Mr. Soward.
(6)  Fourth Year: The Stuart Constitutional Problem, 1603-1660.   Mr. Sage.
Department of Mathematics
Professor: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: F. S. Nowlan.
Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan.
Associate Professor: L. Richardson.
Instructor: F. J. Brand.
Mathematics 2 and 3 are Second Year Courses. Mathematics 2 is a prerequisite for all the Honour Courses.
Pass Courses
1. (a) Algebra.—An elementary course, including
ratio, proportion, variation, interest and annuities, theory
of quadratic equations, simple series, permutations, combinations, the binominal theorem, logarithms.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra, Chapters I
to XV, Oxford.
Students intending to take Mathematics 2 or to enter
Applied Science should purchase the larger edition of The
Intermediate Algebra.
Four hours a week.   First Term.
(6) Analytical Geometry.—Fundamental concepts, loci,
the straight line and circle and an introduction to the other
conies.   Nowlan, Analytic Geometry, McGraw-Hill.
Two hours a week.   Second Term.
(c) Trigonometry.—An elementary course involving the
use of logarithms.
Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry, Copp
Clark.
Wentworth and Hill, Tables (Ginn).
Two hours a week.    Secpnd Term. 3 units. 158 Faculty of Arts and Science
2. (a) Analytical Geometry.—A review of the straight
line and circle, and a study of the other conies.
Nowlan, Analytic Geometry, McGraw-Hill.
Two hours a week.   First Term.   Mr. Nowlan.
(6) Algebra.—The binominal theorem, induction, remainder theorem, Horner's method of approximating roots,
exponeotial, logarithmic and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial fractions. Introduction to convergence and
divergence and to determinants.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra (Larger Edition), Oxford.
Two hours a week.   Second Term.   Mr. Nowlan.
(c) Calculus.—An introductory course in differential
and integral calculus, with various applications.
Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus (Revised Edition), Ginn.
One hour a week.   Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
3. The Mathematical Theory of Investments.—This
course deals with the exponential law, the power law, curve
fitting, the theory of interest, annuities, debentures, valuation of bonds, sinking funds, depreciation, probability and
its application to life insurance.
Bauer, Mathematics Preparatory to Statistics and Finance, Macmillan; Hart, Mathematics of Invesment (Revised), Heath.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Brand. 3 units.
4. Descriptive Astronomy.—The object of this course is
to acquaint the student with the various heavenly bodies
and their motions. It is intended primarily for Pass students, and only a knowledge of elementary mathematics
is essential. The subject-matter treated includes: The shape
and motions of the earth, systems of coordinates, the constellations, planetary motion, gravitation, tides, time, the
stars and nebulae, theories of evolution of the solar system.
Baker, Astronomy, Van Nostrand.
Two hours a week. 2 units. Mathematics 159
Students desiring credit for an additional unit in connection with this course may register for Mathematics
18. They will be required to write essays on prescribed
subjects dealing with various phases of Astronomy.
1 unit.
(Not given in 1932-33.)
Honour Courses
10. Calculus.—The elementary theory and applications
of the subject.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
11. Plane and Spherical Trigonometry.—The work in
plane trigonometry will deal with the following: Identities
and trigonometrical equations, the solution of triangles with
various applications, circumscribed, inscribed and escribed
circles, De Moivre's theorem, expansions of sin n$, etc.,
hyperbolic and inverse functions. The work in spherical
trigonometry will cover the solution of triangles with various applications to astronomy and geodesy.
Loney, Plane Trigonometry, Parts I and II.
Dupuis and Matheson, Spherical Trigonometry and Astronomy, Uglow.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
12. Synthetic Plane and Solid Geometry.—The course
in plane geometry is intended to cover such topics as the
principle of duality, cross ratio geometry, etc. In solid
geometry the principal properties of solid figures are
studied, as well as the theory of projection in space, with
various applications to the conic sections.
Durell, Modern Geometry, Macmillan.
Wilson, Solid Geometry and Conic Sections, Macmillan.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Not given in 1932-33.) 160 Faculty of Arts and Science
13. Plane and Solid Analytical Geometry.—A general
study of the conies and systems of conies, and elementary
work in three dimensions.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
14. Theory of Equations and Determinants.—A course
covering the main theory and use of these subjects.
Dickson, Elementary Theory of Equations, Wiley.
Two hours a week.   Mr. Nowlan. 2 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
15. Higher Algebra.—Selected topics in higher algebra,
including infinite series, continued fractions, the theory of
numbers, probability.
Hall and Knight, Higher Algebra, Macmillan. Chrystal,
Text-book of Algebra.   Part II.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
16. Calculus and Differential Equations.—A continuation of the previous course in calculus, treating partial
differentiation, expansions of functions of many variables,
singular points, reduction formulae, successive integration,
elliptic integrals, and Fourier series.
Ordinary and partial differential equations, with various applications to geometry, mechanics, physics and chemistry.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
17. Applied Mathematics.-—A course dealing with the
applications of mathematics to dynamics of a particle and of
a rigid body, and to the two body problem in celestial mechanics.
Loney, A Treatise on Dynamics of a Particle and Rigid
Bodies, Cambridge.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Richardson. 3 units
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.) Mathematics 161
18. History of Mathematics.—A reading course covering the historical development of the elementary branches
of mathematics from the earliest times to the present.
Ball, History of Mathematics.   Cajori, History of Elementary Mathematics; Smith, History of Mathematics.
Mr. Buchanan. 1 unit.
19. Methods in High School Mathematics.
This course is offered primarily for students in the
Teacher Training Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.   Second Term.
With the consent of the Head of the Department, Fourth
Year students may select one of the Graduate Courses
offered.
Graduate Courses
20. Vector Analysis.—Weatherburn,  Vector Analysis.
21. Theory of Functions of a Real Variable.—Goursat-
Hedrick, Mathematical Analysis, Vol. I.
22. Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable.—Town-
send, Functions of a Complex Variable.
23. Differential Geometry.—Eisenhart, Differential Geometry.
24. Projective Geometry.—Veblen and Young, Projective Geometry, Vol I.
25. Celestial Mechanics.—Moulton, An Introduction to
Celestial Mechanics.
26. Advanced Differential Equations.—Moulton, Differential Equations.
27. Theory of Numbers and Algebric Numbers.—Reid,
Elements of the Theory of Algebraic Numbers.
28. Hyper-complex Numbers.—Dickson, Algebras and
Their Arithmetics. 162 Faculty of Arts and Science
29. Modern Algebraic Theories.—Dickson, Modern Algebraic Theories.
30. Elliptic and Bessel Functions. Byerly, Integral
Calculus, Whittaker and Watson, Modern Analysis, Gray,
Mathews and MacRobert, Bessel Functions.
Department of Modern Languages
Professor: H. Ashton.
Professor: D. O. Evans.
Professor: A. F. B. Clark.
Associate Professor: Isabel Maclnnes,
Assistant Professor: Janet T. Greig.
Instructor: Joyce Hallamore.
Instructor: W. Tipping.
Instructor: D. Dallas.
Assistant:   M
With the consent of the Professor in charge of the course,
a student taking a Pass Degree may be admitted to any
course in the Third and Fourth Years in addition to, but
not in lieu of, 3 (a) and 4 (a). Students from other universities who have already taken the work of 3 (a) or
4 (a), may be given special permission by the Head of the
Department to substitute other courses.
French
1. Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules, Longmans, Toronto. Victor Hugo, Prose et Poesies (Wilson Green), Cambridge. Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1.
Dent. Ashton, A Preface to Moliere, Longmans, Toronto.
(Chaps. I to VI, and VIII.) Weekly, Tutorial French
Grammar, Clive.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the
Fourth Year Courses. 3 units.
Prerequisite: Junior matriculation French or its equivalent. Modern Languages 163
2. La Fontaine, Fables, (Dent). Moliere, Les Femmes
Savantes, Didier. Faguet, Ce que disent les livres, Cambridge. Ashton, A Preface to Moliere, Longmans. (Chaps.
VII, IX to XVI.)
Conversation in French on the above. Written resumes.
Composition from Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1 or Mills, Free Composition, Nelson.
There will be oral tests. 3 units.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the
Fourth Year Courses.
Prerequisite: French 1 or its equivalent.
3. (a) The Literature of the Age of Louis XIV.—Lectures on the history and social conditions of the period, and
on the development of the literature. Careful reading and
discussion of the following texts: Racine, Andromaque,
Didier. Moliere, Le Misanthrope, Didier; Le Tartuffe,
Heath. An Anthology of Seventeenth Century French
Readings, Princeton University Press.
Conversation and written resumes based on the above.
This course is obligatory for all students taking Third
Year French. French 2 is a prerequisite. Students who
cannot write French with some facility are advised not to
attempt 3 (a). They will not be admitted to 3 (b), which
is intended for Honours students.
Students who intend to take French throughout the four
years or who wish to teach this subject should also take 3
(c). 3 units.
3. (b) Literature of the XlXth Century (Poetry and
Novel). Henning, Representative French Lyrics of the
XlXth Century, Ginn; Hugo, Selected Poems, Methuen;
Merimee, Chronique de Charles IX, Balzac, Eugenie Gran-
det (Oxford). 3 units. 164 Faculty of Arts and Science
3. (c) Bibliography, French Composition and Translation from English into French. Kastner and Marks,
French Composition, Pt. 2. 3 units.
(Not given in 1932-33.)
Summer Reading: See the   announcement   after   the
Fourth Year Courses.
4. (a) The Romantic Drama.—Lectures on the evolution of the drama during the 19th century. Extensive independent reading will be expected. Musset, Quatre Comedies, Oxford. Hugo, Hernani, Heath. Alfred de Vigny,
Chatterton, Oxford. Stewart and Tilley, The Romantic
Movement, Cambridge.   Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac.
3 units.
French 3 (a) is a prerequisite. Students who cannot
write accurate French with facility and understand spoken
French are advised not to attempt 4 (a)..
4. (b) Literature and Society in the XVIIth Century.—
Mme. de La Fayette, La Princesse de Cleves, Cambridge;
La Bruyere, Les Caracteres, Cambridge; Mme. de Se-
vigne, Lettres, Manchester; Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules, Longmans; Les Femmes Savantes, Hatier; L'Avare,
Hatier; Le Bourgeois Gentilkomme, Hatier. French 3 (a)
and 3(6) are prerequisite. The requirements for entrance
to 4 (6) are accurately written French and a sufficient
mastery of spoken French to permit conversation on a literary subject.
4. (c) Composition and Oral French.—Book required:
Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 3.       3 units.
Prerequisite: French 3 (c).
(Not given, 1932-33.)
4. (e) The Literature of the Eighteenth Century.—Lectures on the history and social conditions of the period, with
special emphasis on the philosophe movement, and the beginnings of romanticism. The inter-relations of French and
English thought and literature will be touched upon.   Care- Modern Languages 165
ful reading and discussion of the following texts: Selections
from Voltaire (Havens), Century Co. Rousseau, Morceaux choisis (Mornet), Didier. Diderot, Extraits (Fallex),
Delagrave. Beaumarchais, Le Barbier de Seville, Macmillan. 3 units.
5. (a) Methods in High School.—Modern Languages.
Phonetics during First Term (1 hour a week). Methods
during Spring Term. (2 hours a week). Texts for discussion: Hedgcock, Practical French Teaching, Pitman;
Modern Studies, 1918. This course is primarily for students in the Teacher Training course and does not carry
undergraduate credit.
5. (6) Old French and XVIth Century. Texts: Aucassin
et Nicolette; Montaigne, Essais; Ronsard, Poesies; Rabelais, Gargantua.    (For M.A. candidates only.)
5. (c) The French Novel.—A study of the evolution of
the French Novel with special reference to the Nineteenth
Century.    Independent readings are required.
Summer Reading
Upon entering the courses for the years stated, the student must satisfy the instructor that he has read the books
mentioned below.
Second Year:
1. Bernardin de St. Pierre, Paul et Virginie.
2. Balzac, Eugenie Grandet.
3. Saintine, Picciola; or Vigny, Poesies Choisies.
Third Year:
1. Chateaubriand, Atala.
2. Le Sage, Gil Bias.
3. Vigny, Servitude et grandeur militaires.
4. Banville, Gringoire; or Musset, Poesies Choisies. 166 Faculty of Arts and Science
Fourth Year:
1. Moliere, L'Avare.
2. Moliere, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme.
3. Moliere, Les Femmes Savantes.
4. Racine, Andromaque.
5. Racine, Les Plaideurs.
6. Musset, Fantasio.
7. Musset, Un Caprice.
The above have all been chosen from the series Les
Classiques pour tous so as to lighten the cost of buying books
for vacation reading. At the present rate of exchange they
can be bought at the University Bookstore for ten or fifteen cents each. As these books can be carried in the pocket
and read at odd moments, no excuse will be accepted for failure to do summer reading.
German
Beginners' Course.—Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anfdnger,
Ex. 1-32, Heath; Foster and Wooley, Marchen und Geschi-
chten, Heath. Alternate scientific reading, Gore, German
Science Reader, Heath. 3 units.
1. Completion and Revision of Zinnecker. Composition and conversation based on texts read. Bluthgen, Das
Peterle von Nurnberg, Heath; Wells, Drei kleine Lust-
spiele, Heath; Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath.
Science Section with alternate reading. 3 units.
Jr. Matriculation or Beginners' German is prerequisite
for this course.
2. Whitney and Stroebe, Easy German Composition,
Holt.    Composition and conversation based on texts read.
Heine, Die Harzeise, Allyn and Bacon; Lessing, Minna
von Barnhelm, Heath; Bruns, Book of German Lyrics.
3 units.
German 1, or its equivalent, is prerequisite for German 2. Philosophy 167
3. Introduction to the Classical Period.
Lectures on the development of Eighteenth Century
literature. Texts for special study: Lessing, Emilia
Galotti, Heath; Goethe, Faust I, Heath; Schiller, Die
Jungfrau von Orleans, Holt. Composition text: Whitney
and Stroebe, German Composition, Holt. 3 units.
Department of Philosophy
Professor: H. T. J. Coleman.
Professor: James Henderson.
Associate Professor of Psychology and Education:
Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
A^\
1.  (a) Elementary Psychology.
Text-book: Warren, Elements of Human Psychology,
(Revised Edition), Houghton Mifflin.
References: Woodworth, Psychology, A Study of Mental
Life. Stout, A Manual of Psychology. Titchener, A Textbook in Psychology; A Beginner's Psychology. James,
Psychology (Briefer Course). Pillsbury, Essentials of
Psychology.
Two hours a week.    Mrs. Pilcher. 2 units.
(6)  Elementary Logic.
Text-book: Mellone, Introductory Text-book of Logic,
Blackwood (latest edition.)
One hour a week.    Mr. Henderson. 1 unit.
1 (c) Introduction to Philosophy. This course is intended for two classes of students: First, those who contemplate specializing in Philosophy either as Honours or Pass
students in their Third and Fourth Years; and second, those
who wish a single course which will give in an untech-
nical way a statement and discussion of fundamental philosophical problems and thus assist them in their special
studies in other departments.
Text: Patrick, Introduction to Philosophy, Houghton
Mifflin. 168 Faculty of Arts and Science
References: Paulsen, Introduction to Philosophy, Holt.
Bertrand Russell, The Problems of Philosophy, Home University Library. Perry, The Approach to Philosophy, Scribners. Calkins, Persistent Problems in Philosophy, Macmillan.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
2. Ethics.
Text-book: Urban, Fundamentals of Ethics, Holt.
A special study will be made of selected portions of
Aristotle's Ethics, Mill's Utilitarianism, and Kant's Meta-
physic of Morals.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
3. History of Greek Philosophy from Thales to Plato
(inclusive).
Text-books: Bakewell, Source Book in Ancient Philosophy, Scribners. Burnet, Greek Philosophy (Part I), Macmillan. In connection with this course a special study will
be made of Plato's Republic, Phaedo, and Philebus.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Henderson. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
4. The History of Philosophy from the Renaissance to
the Present time.
Text-book: Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy,
Macmillan.
References: Rand, Modern Classical Philosophers, and
the various Histories of Philosophy.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Henderson. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
5. The Philosophy of Kant, with special study of the
Critique of Pure Reason.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Henderson. 3 units.
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
6. Philosophic Movements since the time of Kant. Post-
Kantian Idealism, Pragmatism, Modern Realism, Bergson
and others.
Three hours a week.    Mr. Henderson. 3 units.
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.) Philosophy 169
7. Philosophy of Education. A course of lectures and
discussions dealing with educational movements since the
beginning of the 19th century, and with the theories of
life and of mind which are implicit in these movements.
Texts: Spencer, Education, Everyman Edition. Dewey,
Democracy and Education, Macmillan.
References: Butler, The Meaning of Education. Moore,
What is Education? Adams (ed.), The New Teaching,
Holmes, What is and What might be. Articles in Cyclopedia of Education, Macmillan.
Philosophy 1 (a) and (6) or Philosophy 1 (c) is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
8. Social Psychology.—A study of those particular
phases of mental life and development which are fundamental in social organization and activity.
Texts: McDougall, Social Psychology, The Group Mind,
Methuen, London. Ginsberg, Psychology of Society, Methuen, London. Collateral reading will be prescribed from
the following: Hobhouse, Mind in Evolution, Morals in
Evolution. Sutherland, Origin and Growth of the Moral
Instinct. Cooley, Human Nature and the Social Order.
Wallas, Human Nature in Politics; The Great Society. Ross,
Social Psychology. Trotter, Instincts of the Herd in Peace
and War.    Bernard, Introduction to Social Psychology.
Philosophy 1 (a) and (6) or Philosophy 1 (c) is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week.   Mr. Coleman. 3 units.
9. (1) A Study of the Concept of Intelligence.—Current theories of the nature and growth of intelligence. Its
practical bearing in modern life. Principles and applications of the measurement of intelligence. History of the
movement. The nature and causes of mental defects and
peculiarities.
References: Spearman, The Nature of Intelligence and
the Principles of Cognition, Macmillan; Woodrow, Brightness and Dullness in Children, Lippincott; Peterson, Early 170 Faculty of Arts and Science
Conceptions and Tests of Intelligence, World Book Co.;
Gesell, The Mental Growth of the Pre-School Child, Macmillan; Freeman, Mental Tests, Houghton Mifflin; Pintner,
Intelligence Testing, Holt; Brooks, Psychology of Adolescence, Houghton Mifflin; Garrett, Great Experiments in
Psychology, Harpers; Benjamin, Human Problems, Houghton Mifflin.
(2) Principles of Experimental Procedure.—Method
of Measurement. Practical training in the methods of individual and group examinations. Treatment of subnormal,
normal and gifted children.
Text; Terman, Measurement of Intelligence, Houghton
Mifflin.
References: Terman, Stanford Revision of Binet Simon
Scale, Warwick and York; Wells, Mental Tests in Clinical
Practice, World Book Co.; Bisch, Clinical Practice, Williams and Wilkins; Mateer, The Unstable Child, Appleton;
Hollingworth, Gifted Children, Macmillan; Wallin, Clinical
and Abnormal Psychology, Houghton Mifflin; Cyril Burt,
The Young Delinquent, Appleton.
Three hours a week.    Mrs. Pilcher. 3 units.
Department of Physics
Professor: T. C. Hebb.
Professor: A. E. Hennings.
Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson.
Associate Professor: G. M. Shrum.
Assistants:	
Primarily for First and Second Year students.
1. Introduction to Physics.—A general study of the principles of mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound
and electricity, both in the lecture room and in the laboratory. The course has two objects: (1) to give the minimum
acquaintance with physical science requisite for a liberal
education to those whose studies will be mainly literary;
(2) to be introductory to the courses in Chemistry, Engineering and Advanced Physics.    Students must reach the Physics 171
required standard in both theoretical and practical work.
Open only to students who have not matriculated in Physics.
Text-book: Millikan, Gale and Edwards, A First Course
in Physics for Colleges.
Three lectures and two hours laboratory a week.   3 units.
2. Elementary Physics.—This course consists of a general course in Physics suitable for those students who have
obtained standing in Junior Matriculation Physics or its
equivalent. It covers mechanics, properties of matter, heat,
light, sound, electricity and some of the more recent developments and theories.
Text-book: Stewart, Physics, A text-book for Colleges,
Ginn.
Prerequisite: High School Physics.
Three lectures and one two-hour laboratory period a
week. 3 units.
References: Watson, A Text-book of Physics, Longmans; Kaye and Laby, Physical and Chemical Constants,
Longmans.
3. Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat.—A study of
the statics and dynamics of both a particle and a rigid body,
the laws of gases and vapors, temperature, hygrometry,
capillarity, expansion, and calorimetry.
Text-books: Reynolds, Elementary Mechanics, Prentice-Hall; Draper, Heat and the Principles of Thermodynamics, Blackie & Sons.
Prerequisite:    Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
Primarily for Third Year Students
5. Electricity and Magnetism.—A study of the fundamentals of magnetism and electricity, including alternating currents and electron physics.
Text-book: Brooks & Poyser, Magnetism and Electricity, Longmans.
Prerequisites:   Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory a week. 3 units. 172 Faculty of Arts and Science
6. Theoretical Mechanics.—A selected course in statics,
dynamics of a particle and of a rigid body.
Text-book:   Smith and Longley, Ginn.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
7. Introduction to Theoretical Physics.—A course of
lectures upon selected topics, including elasticity, viscosity,
and hydromechanics.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
8. Physical Optics.—A course of lectures accompanied
by laboratory work, covering optical instruments, interference, diffraction and polarisation.
Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period a
week. 3 units.
References: Schuster and Nicholson, The Theory of
Optics; Houston, Treatise on Light; Mann, Advanced Optics; Wood, Physical Optics; Preston, Theory of Light;
Drude, Theory of Optics; Taylor, College Manual of Optics;
Edser, Light for Students; Robertson, Introduction to
Physical Optics.
Primarily for Fourth Year Students
10. Elementary Spectroscopy.—An introductory course,
outlining the general characteristics of spectra and their
classification.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
References: Baly, Spectroscopy (4 vols.) ; Kayser, Hand-
buch der Spectroscopic; Wood, Physical Optics.
11. Electricity and Magnetism.—In this course, especial attention is given to the theoretical phases of Electricity and Magnetism.
Text-book: Starling, Electricity and Magnetism.
Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 5 and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
12. Introduction to Atomic Structure.—A course of lectures dealing with the conduction of electricity through
gases, cathode and positive rays, X-rays, radioactivity and
other atomic phenomena. Physics 173
Reference books: Andrade, The Structure of the Atom;
Crowther, Ions, Electrons and Ionising Radiations; Sieg-
bahn, Spectroscopy of X-Rays; Aston, Isotopes; Compton,
X-Rays and Electrons; Rutherford, Radioactive Substances
and their Radiations.
Prerequisites: Courses 3 and 5, and Differential and Integral Calculus.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
13. Kinetic Theory of Gases.—A course of lectures giving an exposition of the classical deductions and an outline of recent experimental advances of the subject.
Text-book: Loeb, Kinetic Theory of Gases.
Two lectures a week. 2 units.
14. Thermodynamics.—A course of lectures covering
the fundamental principles of the subject.
Text-book: Birtwistle, The Principles of Thermodynamics.
One lecture a week, a 1 unit.
19. Experimental Physics.—This is chiefly a laboratory
course covering work in thermionics, spectroscopy, high
vacua and general laboratory technique.
Carefully prepared reports, abstracts and bibliographies
will consitute an essential part of the course.
Six hours laboratory a week. 2 to 3 units.
With the consent of the head of the department Fourth
Year students may select one or more units from the following graduate courses.
Primarily for Graduate Students
20. Spectroscopy.—A study of the methods of excitation and observation of spectra, series in arc and spark
spectra, multiplets, Zeeman and Stark effects, and band
spectra.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
21. Radiation and Atomic Structure.—A study of the
theories of radiation and miscellaneous related topics selected from current literature. 174 Faculty of Arts and Science
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
22. Advanced Electricty and Magnetism.—A study of
the Electromagnetic theory and its application, the theories of metallic conduction, and electrical oscillations.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
23. Vector Analysis.—A course of lectures upon the applications of Vector Analysis to problems in Physics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
24. X-rays and Crystal Structure.—A study of the modern methods of production and observation of X-rays, the
Compton effect, X-ray analysis, and the structure of crystals.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
25. The Theory of Sound.—A course of lectures covering the propagation of sound, and the general phenomena
associated with vibrating systems.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
26. The Theory of Potential.—A general course giving
the applications of the Theory of Potential to Physics.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
27. The Theory of Relativity.—An introductory course
to the theory of relativity.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
28. Quantum Mechanics.—An introducction to the theory of Quantum Mechanics, and the application of Wave
Mechanics to atomic problems.
One lecture a week. 1 unit.
40. Methods in High School Physics.—This course is
offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training
Course and does not carry undergraduate credit. Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week.    Second Term. Zoology 175
Department of Zoology
Professor: C. McLean Fraser.
Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer.
Assistant Professor: Gertrude M. Smith.
Note:—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in
Zoology.
1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals. Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups.   Comparative life-histories.
Text-books: Parker and Haswell, Manual of Zoology,
Macmillan.    (American Edition.    1916.)
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory a week. 3 units.
2. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.—A detailed
comparative study of a member of each of the classes of
Vertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First
Term. 2 units.
3. Comparative Anatomy of Invertebrates.—A detailed
comparative study of a member of each of the main classes
of Invertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 2 units.
4. Morphology of Insects.—General Entomology.
A collection of insects is required.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. First
Term. 2 units.
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Entomology.
5. Histology.—Study of the structure and development
of animal tissues.   Methods in histology.
Ten hours a week.   Second Term. 3 units.
6. Embryology.—A general survey of the principles of
vertebrate embryology. Preparation and examination of
embryological sections.
Ten hours a week.   First Term. 3 units. 176 Faculty of Arts and Science
7. Economic Entomology.—A study of the insect pests
of animals and plants; means of combating them.
Lecture and laboratory work, six hours a week. Second
Term. (Not given in 1932-33.) 2 units.
8. Private Reading.—A course of reading on Biological
theories. In this course examinations will be set, but no
class instruction will be given. 2 units.
9. Advanced Entomology.—A course in (a) Insect Morphology and wing venation, or (6) Internal Anatomy and
Histology, or (c) Taxonomy.
Prerequisite: Zoology 4.
Lecture and laboratory work seven hours a week. First
Term. 2 units.
Courses correlated with the work for the major thesis
are given to graduate students. THE
FACULTY
OF
APPLIED SCIENCE
(ENGINEERING, NURSING AND HEALTH) ^    At FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
FOREWORD
The object of the courses in Applied Science is to train
students in exact and fertile thinking, and to give them a
sound knowledge of natural laws and of the means of utilizing natural forces and natural products for the benefit
of man and the advancement of civilization. Experience
shows that such a training is the best yet devised for a
large and increasing proportion of the administrative,
supervisory and technical positions.
The object, then, is to turn out, not finished engineers
or industrial leaders—these are the product of years of
development in the school of experience,—but young men
with a special capacity and training for attaining these
goals, and thus for helping to develop the industries of the
province. Consequently the undergraduate course is made
broad and general rather than narrow and highly specialized.
Furthermore, such a course is not only better suited to
the British Columbia conditions that the graduate will encounter in his after-life, but also better for later specialization, for it furnishes a more solid foundation, a better
background, a broader outlook and a more stimulating atmosphere, all necessary if the specialist is to achieve the
maximum results of which he is capable.
The student is offered a full undergraduate course and
an additional year of graduate study. The preliminary
year required in Arts is intended to increase the student's
general knowledge and to broaden his outlook. It is hoped
that enough interest will be aroused to encourage the student to continue some study of the humanities as a hobby
or recreation.
The first two years in Applied Science proper are spent
in a general course that includes Mathematics and all the
basic sciences.   This gives not only a broad training, but 180 Faculty of Applied Science
enables the student to discover the work for which he has
special liking or aptitude and to select more intelligently
the subjects in which to specialize during the two final
years. During the latter periods students acquire more detailed knowledge and get practice in applying scientific
knowledge, in solving problems, in doing things; and there
is also training in Economics, Law and Industrial Management.
During the long period between sessions, the student is
required to engage in some industrial or professional work
that will afford practical experience not obtainable in the
laboratory or field classes, but that is a necessary supplement to academic study.
An engineering degree in the Applied Science Course of
the University is accepted by the Association of Professional Engineers of the Province of British Columbia in
lieu of four of the six years' practical experience required
by the Engineering Act of the Province for registration to
practise engineering.
Students are advised to register with the Association
of Professional Engineers of British Columbia in their
third year; and to associate themselves with the appropriate engineering societies.
FACILITIES FOR WORK
For laboratory and other Facilities see Pages 26-40.)
ADMISSION
The general requirements for admission to the University are given on Pages 45-47.
As for Arts, complete Junior Matriculation or its equivalent is required for admission to Applied Science, and no
student may enter with any outstanding supplemental in
Junior Matriculation.
Admission to the Second Year Applied Science may be
granted to students who have fulfilled the requirements of
the First Year outlined below, by work outside the Uni- Courses in Applied Science 181
versity, but students are strongly advised to take the First
Year within the University if it is at all possible, for it is a
professional course co-ordinated throughout. It gives the
student a year longer in which to become acquainted with
the work in Applied Science, and hence puts him in a better position to choose the particular branch of Applied
Science to follow; the friendships formed with his classmates in Arts are continued throughout his college life
and tend to offset the narrowing effect of a somewhat specialized course with associates confined to students of the
same interests and knowledge as himself; he becomes
acquainted with the University methods and life during
the year planned to help him make these adjustments, and
enters the comparatively heavy Second Year prepared and
able to work effectively from the opening of the term, which
is unlikely to be possible for a student just beginning life
at the University.
DEGREES
The degrees offered students in this Faculty are:
Bachelor of Applied Science (B.A.Sc).    (See below.)
Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc.). (See Page 216.)
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.Sc.
The degree of Bachelor of Applied Science is granted
on the completion of the work in one of the coursesf given
below:
I.    Chemical Engineering.
II.    Chemistry.
III. Civil Engineering.
IV. Electrical Engineering.
V. Forest Engineering.
VI.    Geological Engineering.
VII.    Mechanical Engineering.
VIII.    Metallurgical Engineering.
IX.    Mining Engineering.
X.    Nursing and Health.
tThe curriculum described in the following pages may be changed from time to
to time as deemed advisable by the Senate 182 Faculty of Applied Science
A double course in Arts and Science and in Applied
Science is offered, leading to the degrees of B.A., and
B.A.Sc.    (See Page 214).
This course is strongly recommended to students who
are young enough to afford the time and to students wishing to enter Applied Science, and who have to their credit
some, but not all, of the requirements of First Year Applied
Science as set forth on Page 184. The latter can select
subjects in their Second Year Arts that will satisfy the
Arts requirements for the double degree, and at the same
time complete the work of First Year Applied Science.
Thus they may qualify for an Arts degree without expending any more time than would be required to qualify
them for entrance into Second Year Applied Science.
PRACTICAL WORK OUTSIDE THE UNIVERSITY
In order to master professional subjects it is very important that the work done at the University should be
supplemented by practical experience in related work outside. Therefore students are expected to spend their summers in employment that will give such experience.
Before a degree will be granted, a candidate is required
to satisfy the Department concerned that he has done at
least four months' practical work related to his chosen
profession. Fourth and Fifth Year Essays (see Page 186)
should be based, as far as possible, upon the summer work.
Upon approval of the Dean and the head of the Department concerned, University credit may be granted for
work done outside the University under the immediate
supervision of the University staff, during the University
session.
Practical work such as Shop-work, Freehand Drawing,
Mechanical Drawing, Surveying, etc., done outside the
University, may be accepted in lieu of laboratory or field
work (but not in lieu of lectures) in these subjects, on the
recommendation of the Head of the Department and approval of the Dean.   Students seeking exemption as above Courses in Applied Science 183
must make written application to the Dean accompanied
by certificates indicating the character of the work done
and the time devoted to it.
OPENING OF SESSION
Lectures begin on Wednesday, September the 28th, and
it is essential to the success of the student that he should
be in attendance at the opening of the session, for in order
to allow as much time as possible for practical work in the
summer, the length of the session has been reduced to the
minimum consistent with the ground to be covered. Consequently a student requires the full session to master the
work. A mere pass standing is a very unsatisfactory preparation for subsequent work or professional life. Further,
from this standpoint, the opening work is the most important of the whole session for the student, for in it are
given the general instructions necessary for the proper attack upon the work.
The only exception is when summer employment affords experience necessary for the course the student is
specializing in, which will lighten to some extent the work
of the session (such as in Geological Survey field work for
geological students), and then only when the nature of
this work makes it impossible for the student to reach the
University on the opening day. Under these circumstances,
if the student furnishes a statement from his employer showing it was impossible for him to release the student earlier,
the Dean may allow the student to enter without penalty.
The student must, however, register at the opening of the
session in accordance with the regulations in reference to
registration.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONS
A student with supplemental must write them off at
the regular time for supplemental examinations before the
opening of the session, for he will need the entire session
for the current year's work. It is also necessary, for a successful year, to have a satisfactory knowledge of the founda- 184 Faculty of Applied Science
tional work of the preceding year. No exceptions to the
above rule will be granted except as under Paragraph 3,
Page 183.
GENERAL OUTLINE OF UNIVERSITY COURSES
Students in Nursing and Health register directly in Applied Science and take the special course outlined on Pages
204-214. All other students of Applied Science have a
general course common to all for the first three years as
under: FIRST YEAR
The students register in Arts and take the following
classes as Arts students:
English 1 (a and b).
Mathematics 1  (Algebra, Geometry, Trigonometry).
Chemistry 1.
Physics 1 or 2.
Latin 1 or French 1 or * German B.
The passing grade is 50 per cent, in each subject of
examination. No student with any supplemental outstanding will be admitted to Second Year Applied Science.
Biology 1, if taken as an optional extra subject, and
passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent., need not be
repeated in the Second Year. Economics 1, taken in Arts,
is accepted in lieu of Economics in Applied Science.
A reading knowledge of French and German is desirable for students in Engineering.
Students who have passed First Year Arts and Science,
but who have failed to make the necessary entrance requirements for the Second Year Applied Science, may take
the September Supplemental Examinations of Arts and
Science.
First Year students are advised to attend the noon-hour
talks on the choice of a profession and on the life and work
in various callings likely to be selected by Applied Science
graduates, as these may assist the student in determining
whether Applied Science is the best course for him.   If he
•Applied Science students  contemplating specializing in  Chemistry or Geology are
advised to take German B. Courses in Applied Science
185
finds it is not, he can proceed in Arts without any loss of
time.
The work of the Second and Third Years is the same
in all courses, except those in Nursing and Health.
SECOND YEAR
Subject
First Term
IS*
Second Term
g-a
U  a,
s*4
Math. 1 Trigonometry.	
Math. 2 Solid Geometry	
Math. 3 Algebra	
Math. 4 Calculus 	
C.E. 1 Descriptive Geom	
M.E. 1 Drawing 1	
Physics 3 Mechanics.™	
Physics 4 Heat. 	
Chem. 2a Qual. Analysis.,	
M.E. 2a Shop Practice	
Biology 1* Introductory.	
C.E. 2 Surveying. 	
CE. 30 Engineering Prob. 1.
248
249
249
249
226
250
266
266
222
250
219
226
236
Field Work
I      4    1...
•Biology  1,  Arts, passed  with a grade of at least 50 per cent., will be accepted
in lieu of this course.
THIRD YEAR
80   ..
g$
6«
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
11
8*
S ft*
3K
3*
Math. 6 Calculus 	
249
249
223
227
252
266
267
227
227
243
227
236
3
2
1
"2
2
2
'"i
2
Fi
3
2
"3
3
2
aid Woi
3
3
2
1
"2
2
2
"2
2
•k
Math. 7 Anal. Geom—	
Chem. 2b Quan. Analysis	
3
C.E. 4 Graphics.—	
2
M.E. 6a Elem. Theory	
Physics 5 Electricity 	
3
C.E. 5 Mapping... 	
3
C.E. 6 Surveying.	
Geology I General 	
2
fCE. 7 Surveying.	
C.E. 31 Engineering Prob. 2	
3
fStudents entering Civil, Forest, Geological, Metallurgical, and Mining Engineering are required to take Civil Engineering 7 (see Page 227) immediately after the
spring  examinations. 186 Faculty of Applied Science
FOURTH AND FIFTH YEARS
Essays
Essays are required of all students entering the Fourth
and Fifth Years, and must conform to the following:
1. The essay shall consist of not less than 2,000 words.
2. It must be a technical description of the engineering
aspects of the work on which the student was engaged
during the summer, or of any scientific or engineering work with which he is familiar. In the preparation of the essay, advantage may be taken of any
source of information, but due acknowledgment must
be made of all authorities consulted. It should be suitably illustrated by drawings, sketches, photographs or
specimens.
3. It must be typewritten, or clearly written on paper of
substantial quality, standard letter size (8V2 x 11
inches), on one side of the paper only, leaving a clear
margin on top and left-hand side. Students are recommended to examine sample reports to be found in
the library or in the departments.
4. All essays must be handed in to the Dean not later than
November 15th.
All essays, when handed in, become the property of the
Department concerned, and are filed for reference. Students may submit duplicate copies of their essays in competition for the students' prizes of the Engineering Institute of Canada, or the Canadian Institute of Mining and
Metallurgy.
Essays will be considered as final Christmas examinations. A maximum of 100 marks is allowed, the value being based on presentation, English and matter. In Fourth
Year essays, presentation, that is, the manner in which the
material is arranged and presented to the reader, is given
most weight, with English second and matter third. In
fifth year essays most emphasis is placed on matter, but
the other two are still rated highly. Courses in Applied Science
187
COURSES
I.    Chemical Engineering
The course in Chemical Engineering should prepare the
student for the duties of managing engineer in a chemical
manufactory. As such he must be conversant not only
with the chemical processes involved, but he must be prepared to design and to oversee the construction of new
buildings and to direct the installation and use of machinery. In the industrial life of British Columbia the chemical
engineer may be more particularly concerned with the manufacture of acids and alkalies, the preparation from natural sources of various organic and inorganic compounds,
the pulp and paper industry, and the utilization of the
waste from a number of industrial plants indigenous to the
Province. Accordingly, the course of study includes a
number of courses in the older branches of engineering
along with the maximum of chemical training allowed by
the time at the disposal of the student.
Fourth Year
to ..
a; es
First Term
Second Term
Subject
8 if
V  u
p.
.§§£
■3«
S u
3*
Essay	
186
237
263
245
223
223
224
255
267
230
3
2
2
2
2
1
2
1
1
~i
3
3
9
2
"3
3
2
"2
2
1
2
1
1
Economics 1 (Arts)	
Met. 1 Introductory	
Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy	
Chem. 3 Organic	
3
Chem. 4 Theoretical	
3
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis	
6
E.E. 1 General	
2
Physics 7 Light (Reading Course)	
CE. 12 Hydraulics.	
"3 188
Faculty of Applied Science
Fifth Year
<U OS
First '
Term
Second Term
Subject
s S .
S O.M
* « Ji
•3"
igis
3«
186
224
224
225
225
225
264
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
3
3
12
2
2
2
2
2
2
Chem. 6 Industrial	
Chem. 7 Physical	
3
Chem. 8 Electro	
3
Chem. 9 Adv. Organic.-	
3
Met. 2 General	
Thesis.	
15
II.    Chemistry
The aim of this course is to train the students in the
practice of Chemistry, and to give a thorough knowledge
in the fundamental principles of this subject, that they
may be prepared to assist in the solution of problems of
value to the industrial and agricultural life of the Province. The course is arranged to give in the first two years
a knowledge of the fundamental principles of Chemistry
and Physics, with sufficient mathematics to enable the
theoretical parts of the subject to be understood.
In the Fourth Year, Analytical, Organic and Physical
Chemistry are studied from the scientific side and in relation to technology; while in the Fifth Year a considerable
amount of time is devoted to a short piece of original work. Courses in Applied Scdence
189
Fourth Year
Subject
o *
First  Term
1|
It
Second Term
lei
■3«
Essay	
Economics I (Arts)	
Chem. 3 Organic	
Chem. 4 Theoretical.	
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis..	
Met. 1 Introductory.	
Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy	
Met. 5 Assaying	
German (Arts) B 	
Physics 7 Light (Reading Course
186
237
223
223
224
263
245
264
166
267
Fifth Year
JO  ..
no-
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
lis
gBj
Jo*
•3"
81
Laboratory
Hours per
Week.
Essay	
186
106
267
224
224
225
225
264
"2
2
2
2
2
2
7
"3
3
3
9
"2
2
2
2
2
2
Bacteriology 1 (Arts)	
Physics 12 Advanced	
Chem. 6 Industrial	
Chem. 7 Physical	
Chem. 8 Electro-—	
3
3
3
Met. 2 General	
Thesis.	
18
III.    Civil Engineering
The broad field covered by Civil Engineering makes it
an adjunct of many other branches of engineering, yet the
Civil Engineer occupies a distinctive field and is intimately
associated with a wide group of undertakings vitally affecting the health, comfort and prosperity of the commonwealth. 190 Faculty of Applied Science
The various branches of Civil Engineering deal with
problems in water supply and water purification; in sewerage systems, sewage disposal plants, and the handling of
municipal and industrial wastes; in hydraulic power development; in irrigation and drainage for agricultural activities ; in all types of structures, bridges and buildings, piers
and docks, sea walls and protective works; in transportation, canals, locks, highways, electric and steam railways;
and in the management and direction of public works,
public utilities, industrial and commercial enterprises.
The course in Civil Engineering is designed to provide,
in so far as time will permit, foundations for. continued
growth along those lines which the student's interest and
environment determine, without compelling too early specialization. Training in pure and applied science, in the
humanities, in economics and engineering law, and in the
technical phases of professional work establishes a broad
basis for the stimulation of a sincere spirit of public service and for the development of that capacity for reliable
work and judgment which makes safe the assumption of
responsibilities.
The methods of instruction are planned with the view
of bringing out the powers and initiative of the students
while training them in habits of accurate analysis and
careful work. Students are encouraged to secure summer
work which will give them an insight into the various
phases of the career upon which they are about to enter,
and the summer essays lay the foundation for the ability
to set forth, in clear and precise language, descriptions and
analyses of projects and engineering activities. In the
Fifth Year thesis an opportunity is given for special investigation and research under the supervision of experienced engineers. Courses in Appldsd Scdsnce
191
Fourth Year
sa ,,
S3
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
11
h
5*.
■2 ft*,
l§*
5«
ft
■Sft^
!§*
3«
186
228
229
229
229
230
230
230
231
253
255 i
237
231
232
235
2
2
2
1
~~2
~2
3
Fi
1
1
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
ild'Woi
1
1
2
2
1
"i
2
3
k
1
1
C.E. 9|Elementary Design	
3
CE. 10 Strength of Mtls 	
3
CE. 11 Railways	
CE. 12 Hydraulics	
3
CE. 13 Mapping. 	
3
CE. 15 Drawing.	
2
M.E. 6(b) Laboratory	
3
E.E. 1 General	
2
CE. 16 Surveying...	
CE. 21 Water Power 	
1
CE. 28 Seminar	
Fifth Year
03  „
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
S ft*
* « Si
Si •-*
is*
•3"
li
**?
P<
iS*
,3"
186
231
231
232
232
232
233
234
234
235
235
235
235
236
i
2
"i"
i
2
2
2
1
R*
"i
1
6
"i
"3
6
quired
3
1
"2
1
1
2
2
2
1
Sat. A.
"i
1
C.E. 17 Structural Design 	
6
C.E. 18(a) Engineering Economics....
CE. 18(b) Engineering Economics....
CE. 19 Law—Contracts	
C.E. 20 Geodesy	
CE. 22 Municipal	
CE. 23 Transportation	
2
CE. 24 Mechanics of Mtls	
3
C.E. 25 Theory of Structures	
6
CE. 26 Trips.	
M.
CE. 27 Thesis	
3
C.E. 28 Seminar	
1 192
Faculty of Applied Science
IV.    Electrical Engineering
This course is designed for those students who desire
a general training in the theory and practice of Electrical
Engineering. The Fourth Year of the course is devoted to
the study of the basic principles of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, and is intended to prepare the student
for the more specialized courses which are given in the
Fifth Year. In the Fifth Year an intensive course in all
the important branches of Design, Transmission, Electro-
Technology, Radio and Electric Traction, is given, together
with thorough laboratory work in most of these subjects.
Fourth Year
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
►J v
ft
Jgi*
3"
ii
si
S ax
!§*
Essay	
186
257
r 257
249
251
253
251
258
258
230
251
252
229
251
3
3
2
3
2
2
1
2
"2
3
3
"i
3
1
3
2
i
2
3
2
3
2
2
"i
2
2
*E.E. 2 Direct Current Technology..
*E.E. 3 Elementary AC Technology
*Math. 8 or 9 (Adv. Calculus)
*M.E. 3 Kinematics	
"3
*M.E. 7 Heat Engines.	
3
*M.E. 4 Dynamics	
*E.E. 5 Electrical and Magnetic Measurements and Instruments	
*E.E. 6 Electrical Problem Course....
*CE. 12 Hydraulics	
"2
3
*M.E. 5 Machine Design	
M.E. 5(a) Problem Course in
Strength of Materials and
Design	
1
*CE. 10 Strength of Materials	
fM.E. 2 b	
3
2
*P re-requisite for Electrical Students entering Fifth Year,
t Optional. Courses in Applied Science
193
Fifth Year
o «>   '
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
H
ft
.2 If*
ii
ft
•S ft*
,2g£
Essay	
186
258
258
259
255
254
259
259
249
260
261
253
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
2
1
1
3
2
6
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
2
1
1
E.E. 7 Design of Electrical
Machinerv	
E.E. 8 Electrical Traction.. 	
3
E.E. 9 Transmission and Distribution
of Electrical Energy	
M.E. 15 Prime Movers	
M.E. 14 Mechanical Design.	
E.Et 10 Electrical Problem Course...
E.E7 11 Radio Telegraphy and
Radio Telephony	
2
Math. 8 or 9 (Differential Equa.
or Adv. Calculus)	
E.E. 12 Electro-technology	
6
E.E. 13 Transient Phenomena and
Oscillations	
M.E. 8 Steam Turbines 	
V.    Forest Engineering
In British Columbia the forest industries, including
logging and the manufacture of lumber, pulp and paper,
lead all others. They must always play a very important
part in the economy of the Province, because seven-eighths
of the productive land is absolute forest soil, that will
grow good timber but no other crop of value; and because
over half the remaining stand of saw-timber—the last big
reserve—of Canada is here. The development of these industries is requiring more and more the services of engineers, and especially is this true in logging. Furthermore,
most of the forest land is owned by the public, and the
management of these vast estates is a task that will require constant growth on the part of the government
forest services. 194 Faculty of Applied Science
This indicates very briefly the various fields of service
open to Forest Engineers, and for which the course of
studies is designed. Primarily the course is planned for
the lumber industry, and a major part of the time—apart
from the preliminary foundation work—is devoted to the
branches of engineering most used in it. In addition, the
fundamental subjects of forestry are covered. As in other
engineering courses the students are expected to obtain
practical experience during the summer vacations, this
being an essential supplement to the studies at the University.
Vancouver contains large sawmills, wood-working
plants, and plants for seasoning and preserving wood—
more, in fact, than any other place in the Province. Pulp
mills, logging operations and extensive forests are within
easy reach. The advantages of location are therefore exceptional. A special feature is the affiliation of the Forest
Products Laboratory of Canada, maintained at the University by a co-operative arrangement with the Dominion
Forestry Branch. A description of the Laboratory and its
activities is given on page 242. It affords opportunities
for instruction in testing the mechanical properties of
timber and other structural materials, and facilities are now
provided for experimental and demonstration work in wood
seasoning.
THE UNIVERSITY FOREST
A great asset to the University site is the forest, a
small remnant of the luxuriant stand that once covered the
whole peninsula. Not only does it add very much to the
beauty of the surroundings, but it is valuable as a shelter
belt, a place of recreation, and a convenient demonstration
and field study area for the departments of Forestry, Botany and Zoology. Courses in Applied Science
195
The forest is in the form of a long narrow belt on the
western side of the site, flanking Marine Drive for nearly
a mile, and containing over 85 acres. In composition it is
typical of the lowland stands of the southern coast, and
all the principal species of trees and shrubs of the region
are represented, including specimens of the old trees as
well as a large amount of young growth of different ages.
A small forest nursery is being developed and used for
experimental and demonstration work in silviculture and
also to provide planting stock for the forest.
Fourth Year
EC   „
u v    *
o "
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
§35
«>  U
>J s
ft
•P*
5W
h u »
5g^
5«
Essay	
186
237
238
238
238
220
221
255
228
229
229
229
230
230
230
1
1
"~2
1
2
1
2
2
"i
1
"I
"~i
2
2
3
"3
"3
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
"i
2
2
...
F.E. 1 General Forestry	
F.E. 2 Mensuration*. 	
4
F.E. 3 Protection	
F.E. 4 Finance 	
Bot. 1 General Botany	
0
Bot. 5 (b) Dendrology..	
2
E.E. 1 Fundamentals	
2
CE. 8 (a) Foundations	
C.E. 9 Structural Design. _	
3
C.E. 10 Strength Materials	
CE. 11 Railways	
3
CE. 13 Mapping. 	
3
C.E. 14 Surveying. 	
CE. 12 Hydraulics.	
3
.
•Also 1 week Field Work immediately after spring examinations. 196
Faculty of Applied Science
"Fifth Year
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
81
l§*
¥
Essay	
186
239
239
239
240
240
240
241
241
221
271 I
222
231
231
232
253
2
1
1
2
2
j}
1
1
2
1
3
"4
2
3
"3
2
1
1
2
1
2I
"2 i
1
"i
2
1
F.E. 5 Technology	
3
F.E. 6 Organization            	
F.E. 7 History.	
F.E. 8 Silviculture*	
3
F.E. 9 Lumbering	
F.E. 10 Logging*	
F.E. 11 Milling*	
4
F.E. 12 Products*	
Bot. 6 (b) Pathology         1
Zool. 7 Entomology           j
Bot. 7 (a) Ecology	
2
CE. 17 Structural Design	
CE. 18 Economics	
C.E. 19 Law...	
3
M.E. 6 (b) Steam Lab	
3
•Field trips are required in these courses and students should be prepared for a
total expense which should not exceed $20 each.
VI.    Geological Engineering
This course is designed to meet the requirements of
students who intend to enter Geology as a profession, and
such students are strongly advised to take this particular
course of training.
It gives a broad training not only in Geology, but also
in the sciences of Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics, which are extensively applied in the solution of
geological problems. The engineering subjects are useful
not only to the Mining and Consulting Geologist and the
Geological Surveyor, but to the Geologist engaged in original research in any branch of the science.
The course therefore furnishes a foundation for the
professions of Mineralogist, Geological Surveyor, Mining
Geologist, Consulting Geologist, Palaeontologist, Geographer, etc., and is useful for those who will be in any
way connected with the discovery or development of the
natural resources of the country. Courses in Applied Science
197
As a supplement to the work in the classroom, laboratory and field during the session, the student is expected
to obtain practical experience during the summer vacation.
Students are advised to become student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Fourth Year
Oft.
>- Si
0 v
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
U
$ ax
<••
.Sgf*
J*
►J »
0,
Essay	
186
245
245
246
223
262
264
263
265
271
230
224
264
2
3
3
2
2
1
2
1
2
"i
2
...
3
~5
2
6
3
2
3
3
2
2
"2
1
2
"l
Geol. 2 Mineralogy.	
2
Geol. 4 Structural	
Geol. 5 Regional	
1
Chem. 4 Theoretical.	
3
Min. 1 Metal Mining.	
Met. 5 Fire Assaying.	
Met. 1 General	
Ore Dressing 1 General	
Zool. 1	
2
CE. 13 Mapping..   	
3
Chem. 5* Adv. Analysis	
6
Met. 6* Wet Assaying.	
3
•Either Chem. 5 or Met.  6 must be taken.
Fifth Year
o v
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
li
n 2 »
3«
05 JA
2 B.M
■3"
Essay	
186
246
246
247
231
247
247
262
262
263
264
265
265
2
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
4
1
"2
3
"3
4
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
1
Geol. 6 Palaeontology 	
2
Geol. 7 Petrology	
4
Geol. 8 Economic     	
1
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics	
Geol. 9 Mineralography	
2
Geol. 10 Field	
3
Min. 2 Coal and Placer 	
Min. 3 Metal Mining. 	
Min. 5 Surveving	
Met. 2 Smelting..   	
Ore Dressing 1	
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory.	
3
Thesis..	
5 198 Faculty of Applied Science
VII.   Mechanical Engineering
The course in Mechanical Engineering has been designed
to give the student a thorough knowledge of the theory and
application of those basic subjects which are essential in
this branch of Engineering.
With this in view stress has been laid upon such subjects as Mathematics, Physics, Applied Mechanics, Strength
of Materials, Applied Thermodynamics and Hydraulics.
Graduates of this course are therefore qualified to enter
upon any of the many specialized branches of this profession, especially in British Columbia, whose rapid industrial
development demands Mechanical Engineers prepared to
attack a great diversity of problems.
Although fundamentally general in character the course
embodies design of prime movers; mechanical and hydraulic
machinery design; power plant operation and design; and
the testing of engines and power plants, thus giving sufficient specialized training in Mechanical Engineering to enable students to enter the field of design or research should
they so desire.
Students following this course are given a general course
in the fundamentals of Electrical Engineering. Courses in Applied Sconce
199
Fourth Year
Subject
o a
Oft
k J
O  u
FirBt Term
Second Term
M p,
IF
*CE. 10 Strength of Materials	
*M.E. 3 Kinematics	
*M.E. 4 Dynamics of Machines	
*M.E. 5 Machine Design	
M.E. 5 (a) Problems in Materials
and Design	
*M.E. 7 Heat Engines	
*M.E. 13 Physical Treatment of
J^Ic tills
E.E. 2 and 3 Eiectricai'DC and
AC Technology	
*CE. 12 Hydraulics	
•Math. 8 Advanced Calculus or
Math. 9 Differential Equations
(b) Shop	
tM.E. 2
*—
229
251
251
251
252
253
254
257
230
249
251
186
•Pre-requisite for Mechanical students entering the Fifth Year.
tOptional.
Fifth Year
oft
ft"
First
rerm
Second Term
Subject
ii
h
$ SI
* "5
3«
|8 .
S p.*
M.E. 8 Steam Turbines...	
253
253
253
254
254
255
255
255
255
255
261
249
186
\]
i
i
2
2
1
1
"2
3
5
~3
5
2
5
i)
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
3
M.E. 9 Internal Combustion Eng.....
M.E. 10 Refrigeration	
5
fM.E. 11 Heating and Ventilation ..
M.E.    12 Power Plant Design...
M.E. 15 Prime Movers	
'"3
M.E. 16 Machine Design	
5
M.E. 17 Mechanics of Materials.	
fM.E. 18 Aeronautics ._	
M.E. 19 Problems in Mech. and
Elec. Eng	
2
E.E. 14 General ._	
5
Math. 9 Differential Equations or
Math. 8 Adv. Calculus	
Essay 	
t Alternative subjects. 200 Faculty of Applied Science
VIII.-IX.    Metallurgical and Mining Engineering
Modern Metallurgical practice covers a wide and expanding field. The Metallurgical Engineer has to design
and operate a great variety of plants and processes. He
must be able to deal with furnace and solution processes,
based on chemical principles, and mechanical crushing and
separating processes, based on physical principles, together
with an immense variety of principal and auxiliary machinery, from small to immense, used in the separation and
refining of ores, artificial mineral products and metals.
The whole forms a keenly competitive and strictly commercial industry, based on, and closely limited by, the
practical economic considerations of costs and profits.
Rapid and continuous change and improvement is the rule.
Methods and machines quickly become obsolete. The field
for research and improvement in methods and machinery
is ever widening, though the economic margin is ever narrowing.
The Metallurgical course, in the Fourth and Fifth
Years, based on the fundamental earlier years, is designed
to give the student a broad general knowledge of standard
metallurgical methods and machinery, with a fundamental
grasp of the actual applications of the basic sciences in
practical metallurgical operations, also sufficient laboratory
practice to illustrate and fix these in his mind and train
him for an actual junior position after graduation.
Modern mining operations cover a field notable for its
breadth and variety. The discovery, steadily becoming
more difficult, and the development, steadily becoming
more scientific, of new mineral deposits are based largely
on a knowledge of the laws and processes of Nature, ultimately physical and chemical, but, immediately, chiefly
geological in kind. On the other hand, the operations of
actual mining are largely mechanical in kind, and call for
use and knowledge of mechanical and electrical equipment,
adapted to underground methods and conditions. Courses in Applied Science 201
The conditions under which mining operations are carried on are often of great natural difficulty, and many of
the factors to be dealt with are, to a large extent, obscure
or indefinite oftener than measurable. The qualities of
good judgment and decision are therefore of great importance in the application of technical knowledge to
mining. As in metallurgy, economic considerations are
paramount.
The Mining course is correspondingly broad in scope.
In addition to the fundamental sciences, it includes fundamental subjects in Civil, Electrical and Mechanical Engineering, Economics and Economic Geology.
The special mining subjects cover the underlying principles and practice on which the discovery, development
and economic operation of mines are based, the practical
application of technical knowledge to actual operations, and
the use of judgment and decision, by precept, example and
illustration. Sufficient practical training and laboratory
work are included to fit the student for an actual junior
position after graduation. While not given as separate
subjects, the social, administrative and ethical sides of the
professions of Mining and Metallurgy are included in the
general treatment of appropriate subjects.
In this University, emphasis is naturally placed on
British Columbia conditions and its chief mineral products,
namely: Gold, Silver, Lead, Zinc, Copper, Coal and Coke.
The University is conveniently located in proximity to
coal and metal mining districts, large coal and metal mining
operations being carried on within a few hours' journey,
in connection with which there are large washing and ore
concentration plants. There is a large metallurgical plant
at Tacoma, within an easy day's journey. Students have
little difficulty in obtaining positions in mines or smelters
during their vacation, as several of the larger companies
have established the practice of accepting student employees in reasonable numbers during the vacation months. 202
Faculty of Applied Science
Students are recommended to spend their vacations at
practical works, in connection with Metallurgy or Mining,
and are required to do so between the Fourth and Fifth
Years as an essential part of their course, without which
a degree will not be granted. An essay covering this work
is also required, as specified in the Fifth Year curriculum.
Students are advised to become student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
VIII.   Metallurgical Engineering
Fourth Year
to ,,
Qft
S3
First
Term
.   Second Term
Subject
" » 9!
u u *
J*
ii
ft
2s|
Essay	
186
237
229
229
230
230
253
245
255
262
265
263
264
264
3
►   "2
1
"2
2
2
1
2
1
"3*
"3
2
2
"5
3
3
1
2
1
"2
2
2
1
2
Economics 1 (Arts)	
CE. 9 Elem. Design	
3
C E. 10 Str. of Materials	
CE. 12 Hydraulics	
3
3
CE. 13 Mapping. 	
3
M.E. 6 (b) Laboratory	
3
Geol. 2 Mineralogy	
2
E.E. 1 General.—	
2
Min. 1 Metal Mining. 	
Ore Dressing 1 General	
Met. 1 General	
3
Fifth Year
.2 So
Qft
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
SI
Pi
3«
I*
Pi
Essay	
186
247
247
232
225
265
262
264
264
264
265
3
2
2
"2
2
2
"l
2
1
"3
9
9
"3
2
2
2
2
2
...
Geol. 9 Mineralography.	
C>
Geol. 8 Economic	
1
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics	
Chem. 8 Electro-.	
3
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory.	
9
Met. 2 Smelting..	
Met. 3 Calculations	
Met. 4 Analysis    	
9 Courses in Applied Sconce
203
IX.    Mining Engineering
Fourth Year
As in Metallurgical Engineering.    (See Page 202).
Fifth Year
09  ,.
oft
First
Term
Second Term
Subject
ii
■3«
Pi
a**
" » Si
t. &. <M
18*
,3W
Essay	
186
246
247
232
264
265
262
262
262
263
263
263
265
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
...
4
1
9
3
2
3
2
2
"2
2
2
...
...
Geol. 7 Petrology	
4
Geol. 8 Economic	
1
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics	
Met. 2 Smelting	
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory.	
9
Min. 2 Coal and Placer. 	
Min. 3 Metal Mining.	
Min. 4 Machinery..	
Min. 5 Surveying	
Min. 7 Methods. 	
Min. 6 Design	
3
Ore Dressing l._	
Short Courses in Mining
In place of the short day-time courses in Mining given
at the University in previous years, Short Courses in
Mining Subjects will be given each year as night classes in
connection with the British Columbia Chamber of Mines
and the Vancouver School Board. Classes are held on
Monday and Thursday evenings and include lectures on
Mining, Smelting, Ore Dressing, Geology and Mineralogy,
with practical laboratory work in Mineralogy. These
courses usually begin about November 1st and continue
until the end of March.
The classes are open to prospectors, business men and
any others interested. A fee of $5.00 is charged for the
full courses, and registration should be made at the office
of the Chamber of Mines, 402 Pender St. W., Vancouver,
B.C. Correspondence in regard to the courses and applications for registration, accompanied by fee, should be addressed to the Chamber of Mines. 204 Faculty of Applied Science
X.    Nursing and Health
1. Nursing A.—A five-year undergraduate course. (See
below.
2. Nursing B.—A graduate course of one academic year
in Public Health Nursing.    (See Page 209).
3. Nursing C.—A graduate course of one academic year
in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. (See
Page 210).
4. A double course for the combined degrees of B.A.
and B.A.Sc.  (Nursing).    (See Page 214).
Registration for these courses will be subject to the
general University Regulations (see Pages 45-47) and to
the special requirements of the Department.
All regulations are subject to change from year to year,
and subjects or courses may be modified during the year
as the Faculty may deem advisable.
Nursing A (Five-year Undergraduate Course)
This is a five-year combined course leading to the Degree
of B.A.Sc. (Nursing) and to the Diploma in Nursing of an
associated hospital. It is given by the University in cooperation with the Schools of Nursing of associated hospitals, which means those hospitals that have signified their
willingness to supply the professional part of the course,
and have received the approval of the University Senate
for that purpose. Up to the present time the Vancouver
General Hospital is the only hospital which has entered
into association with the University to this end.
The course is open to applicants who meet the general
requirements mentioned above, and who, in the opinion of
the Department, are personally fitted for the profession of
nursing. In addition they must satisfy the entrance requirements of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing;
the individual applicant must make her arrangements for
admission to the associated hospital directly with the
Superintendent of Nurses and in advance of the opening of
the University term. Courses in Appldsd Schsnce 205
Nurses who have graduated from a hospital that is in
affiliation with this University or otherwise approved of
by the Senate, may be awarded the degree on complying
with the following conditions:
1. They shall have matriculated.
2. They shall take, or shall have taken, the full academic training laid down for this course. At least
one year of such training shall be, or shall have
been, taken in the University of British Columbia.
3. Except under special circumstances, the course shall
be entered upon within two years of the time of graduating as a nurse.
▼^
The aim of the five-year combined course is to afford a
broader education than can be given by the Hospital Schools
of Nursing alone, and thus to build a sound foundation for
those who desire to fit themselves for Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing or for Public Health Nursing
service.
The First and Second Years (of the Five-Year course),
or the First, Second, and Third Years (of the Double
Course), which are academic, give the students an introduction to general cultural subjects and a foundation in the
sciences underlying the practice of nursing. Between the
Second and Third Years (of the Five-Year course), or between the Third and Fourth Years (of the Double Course),
a probationary period of four months will be spent in an
associated Hospital School of Nursing. The Third and
Fourth Years (in the Five-Year course) and the Fourth
and Fifth Years (in the Double Course) are devoted to
professional training in an associated Hospital, and are
planned to afford experience and training in the care of
the sick, and to develop the skill, observation and judgment necessary to the efficient practice of nursing. The
Final Year (which is the same for the Five-Year and the 206
Faculty of Applied Science
Double Course) affords two alternative courses, one in
Public Health Nursing (Nursing B) and the second in
Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing (Nursing C).
First Year (Academic)
Subject
?!
0)
ha
Ofc
V
*
First Term
•J u
bsj
2*4
Second Term
J J
2 A*
I 8*
English 1 (a)	
English 1 (b)	
Choice of Mathematics 1  I
or Latin 1  '
or French 1...  [
or History 1, 2, or 4  '
Philosophy 1 (a) and (b)	
Chemistry I	
Biology l._	
History of Nursing	
139
139
157
122
162
149
167
115
108
268
Probationary Period (Hospital)
It is expected that the probationary period of four
months (to be spent in an associated hospital), will be
taken between the second and third academic years. The
student must, however, meet the admission requirements
of the associated Hospital School of Nursing (which requirements each student will learn upon making application to the School). The student must have attained such
age as may be fixed by the associated Hospital School of
Nursing—in the Vancouver General Hospital School of
Nursing the eighteenth birthday must be attained before the
student may enter upon the probationary period, and the
nineteenth birthday before the student may enter upon the
Third and Fourth (or professional) years. Also, the student's academic standing must be acceptable to the associated Hospital School of Nursing.
During this period the student will undergo rigid examination as to fitness in physique, temperament and character for the practice of  nursing.    This   will  afford   the Courses in Applied Science
207
Hospital School of Nursing information upon which to
judge the student's qualifications for the profession of
nursing. It also enables the student to determine whether
she feels herself personally fitted or inclined to proceed in
the course. The Hospital Schools of Nursing reserve the
right to reject candidates who do not reach the required
standards.
Second Year (Academic)
Subject
Qft
First Term
si
O  3^
Second Term
IS*
3*
English 2	
Zoology 1 	
Physics 1 or 2	
Economics 1	
Bacteriology 1	
Bacteriology 2	
Anatomy and Physiology.
139
175
170
124
106
107
Third and Fourth Years (Professional)
The Third and Fourth Years will be spent in practical
training in an associated Hospital School of Nursing. Students in these years are required to register with the University even though during this portion of the course they
are in residence at the Hospital. During these professional
years students are subject to the authority and are under
the direction of the officers of the associated Hospital
Schools of Nursing. The required professional period is
twenty-eight months, in which is included the probationary
period of four months. Full maintenance and such allowance as the associated Hospital authorities may designate
are accorded, and a yearly vacation is granted at the convenience of the Superintendent of the School of Nursing.
A registration fee may be required by the associated Hospital. 208 Faculty of Applied Science
The following is an outline of the course as given in the
Hospital at present associated with the University (the
Vancouver General Hospital).
Instruction in the following Nursing subjects is given
by members of the medical staff and by qualified nurse instructors: Introductory Ethics of Nursing; Practical Nursing Procedures; Elementary Nutrition and Cookery; Drugs
and Solutions; Materia Medica; Surgical Nursing; Medical
Nursing (including charting); Gynecological Nursing;
Nursing of Communicable Diseases; Obstetrical Nursing;
Diet in Disease; Pediatric Nursing and Infant Feeding;
Nursing in Diseases of the Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat;
Nursing in Tuberculosis; Urinalysis; Introduction to
Anaesthesia; Introduction to Physiotherapy and X-Ray.
This schedule is open to change at any time, at the
discretion of the associated Hospital School of Nursing.
The period of Hospital service includes actual nursing
experience in the following departments:
Medical. Operating Room.
Surgical. Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat.
Gynecological. Obstetrical.
Pediatric and Orthopaedic. Infectious.
Observation and Neurological. Tuberculosis.
Infants. Diet Kitchen.
In order to give the student an understanding of the
tuberculosis situation in the Province, and of the value of
sanatorium treatment, an arrangement has been made between the Vancouver General Hospital and the Provincial
Sanatorium at Tranquille, and an opportunity will be given
to as many of the students as possible to receive instruction in the nursing care of tuberculosis in this affiliating
institution, in lieu of the course in the tuberculosis department of the Hospital. Courses in Applied Science 209
The Social Service Department of the Hospital offers
opportunity for a four weeks' service to a limited number
of students. Selection will be made by the Superintendent
of Nurses from the students desirous of receiving this
course.
Fifth Year (Academic and Professional)
The Fifth Year will be spent in either Nursing B or
Nursing C, at the option of the student. The selection between these courses need not be made until registering
with the University for the Fifth Year.
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work
in the University and appropriate field work under the
supervision of the various associated Public Health organizations. This course leads to a Certificate in Public Health
Nursing. 210
Faculty of Applied Science
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
Subject
For Details
See Page:
Total Hours
Lectures.
Total Hours
Laboratory.
Preventable Diseases....	
268
268
268
268
268
268
269
269
269
269
269
269
269
270
270
270
270
270
136
136
270
271
r 271
17
17
8
9
11
17
4
4
16
51
k 2
34
17
13
6
2
9
51
51
IS
18
Tuberculosis	
Bacteriology	
*
Infant Welfare.	
Public Health..	
Public Hfiftl+.h  Administration
Public Health Organizations..	
Vital Statistics	
Principles and Practice of Public
Urban Visiting Nursing Programme.	
History of Nursing and Contemporary
Nursing Problems	
School Hygiene	
Social Case Work	
Hospital Social Service 	
Metabolism and Nutrition 	
(1) Educational Psychology	
(2) School Administration and Law	
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure. 	
Motor Mechanics. - 	
10
Field Work 	
To run  concurrently
work.
•Hours to be arranged.
Nursing C (Teaching and Supervision)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work
in the University, and opportunity for practice teaching
and for the observation of Training School administration
and ward supervision in associated Hospitals. This course
leads to a Certificate in Teaching and Supervision in
Schools of Nursing. Courses in Appldsd Science
211
Nursing C
Subject
For Details
See Page:
Total Hours
Lectures.
Total Hours
Laboratory.
Preventable Diseases 	
Mental Hygiene ,	
Bacteriology	
History of Nursing and Contemporary
Nursing Problems	
Teaching in Schools of Nursing 	
Principles of Supervision in Schools
of Nursing. 	
Metabolism and Nutrition	
(1) Educational Psychology	
1. Introduction to the Study of
Education	
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure 	
Sociology	
Social Case Work	
Electives from Nursing B or from
related Science Courses (to make
up three units)	
Field Work	
268
268
268
270
270
270
270
270
134
270
271
270
Below
17
9
17
51
34
8
51
51
18
18
6
•Hours to be arranged.
Field Work in Nursing B and C
Through the courtesy and co-operation of the following
agencies arrangements have been made for supervised field
work or observation:
FOR NURSING B
Vancouver General Hospital.—The Social Service Department, Mrs. Laura B. Gordon, Director.
The Provincial Department of Health.—Dr. H. E.
Young, Provincial Health Officer.
The Victorian Order of Nurses.—Miss M. Duffield, District Superintendent.
The Medical Department of the Vancouver Public
Schools.—Dr. H. White, Medical Director; Miss E. Breeze,
Director, School Hygiene. 212 Faculty of Applied Science
The Vancouver Rotary Clinic for Diseases of the Chest.
—Dr. H. A. Rawlings, Director.
The Department of Child Hygiene, City of Vancouver.
—Dr. J. W. Mcintosh, City Health Officer; Miss L. Sanders,
Supervisor, Department of Child Hygiene.
The Government Venereal Disease Clinic.—Dr. J. Ewart
Campbell, Director; Miss E. V. Cameron, Nurse in charge.
The Provincial Mental Hospital, Essondale.—Dr. A. L.
Crease, Medical Superintendent; Miss Hicks, Superintendent of Nurses.
FOR NURSING C
The Vancouver General Hospital.—Dr. A. K. Haywood,
Superintendent; Miss Grace Fairley, Superintendent of
Nurses.
The academic work and * field work will run concurrently throughout the two University terms, with the exception of the last four weeks of the Second Term, which,
in Nursing B, will be devoted entirely to field work under
the supervision of the Provincial Rural Public Health Nursing organizations and, in Nursing C, to such Hospital Service as may be arranged by the Associated Hospitals. Field
work for some students may have to be delayed until after
the close of the University year.
During the period spent in the Hospital, all students
will be subject to the authority, and under the direction,
of the officers of the Associated Hospital School of Nursing.
Adequate opportunity for observation, as well as for
practice, is thus afforded in all of the more important fields
of Public Health Nursing and in the field of Teaching and
Supervision in Schools of Nursing.
•That students may have some idea of the probable expenses of the course, they
are reminded that in addition to the usual expenses of a University course, there will
be additional expenses in connection with the term of approximately eight weeks
field work. The sum of one hundred dollars is mentioned as probably the maximum
amount required to cover the expense of board and lodging while with the rural
nursing organization, and of transportation. Courses in Applied Science 213
Admission to Nursing B and C
The courses are open to students of the five-year course,
and also to nurses who have graduated from recognized
Schools of Nursing, who are eligible for registration in
British Columbia and who are personally fitted for their
proposed work. For Nursing B applicants shall have received adequate instruction and practical experience in
the nursing care of communicable diseases and of diseases
of infancy and childhood. For Nursing C it is required
that applicants shall fulfill the University Educational requirement of Junior Matriculation.
Applications for admission to the courses of Nursing B
or C should be sent to the Department of Nursing and
Health not later than July 15th of the current year. A
certificate of good health and physical condition, signed by
a regular practising physician, must be presented with the
applications.
As a preparation for Nursing B, nurses without previous
Public Health Nursing service are advised to obtain at
least one month's experience in a visiting nursing agency,
or other public health or social agency approved by the
Department. While not obligatory, this month is most
important, and various Field Agencies—the Provincial
Board of Health, the Vancouver General Hospital Social
Service Department and the Victorian Order of Nurses,
have each agreed to receive nurses for this month in so
far as it can be arranged. Inquiry should be made at as
early a date as possible to the Department of Nursing and
Health that arrangements may be made with the Field
Agencies; the nurses will be responsible for their own
maintenance, and will receive no remuneration during
this period.
Nurses registering for Nursing C who have had no experience in family case-work, social service or visiting nurs- 214 Faculty of Applied Science
ing, are also advised to   secure  this   month's   experience
with one of the Public Health organizations if possible.
For the convenience of graduate nurses already engaged in nursing, who wish to take Nursing B or C, but
are unable to take a year off, provision is made that either
one may be taken as a part-time course over a period of
two or more years. Nurses registering in this way must
fulfil the same requirements as the regular-course students.
DOUBLE COURSES FOR THE DEGREES OF
B.A. AND B.A.Sc.
I.   Arts and Science, and Nursing:
First Year
Second Year
English 1.
English 2.
Mathematics 1.
Language 2.
Language 1.
Chemistry 1 or
Physics 1 or 2 or
Physics 1 or 2.
Chemistry 1.
Zoology 1.
Biology 1.
Economics 1 or
History of Nursing.
History 1 or
1 unit.
Philosophy 1 (a) and (b)
Anatomy and Physiology.
2 units.
Third Year
Bacteriology 1 and 2.
4 units
Sociology or Public Health.                                   3 units,
Nine additional units to be chosen in accordance with
Calendar regulations, not more than three of which may
be chosen from First and Second Year Subjects.      9 units. Courses in Applied Science 215
Fourth and Fifth Years (Professional)
The degree of B.A. is granted upon completion of the
Fifth Year.   The diploma  from  the  Hospital  School   of
Nursing is also awarded upon the completion of the Fifth
Year.
Sixth Year
As the present Fifth Year,—i.e. a choice between the
two courses,—Nursing B and Nursing C.   The degree of
B.A.Sc. (Nursing) is granted upon completion of the Sixth
Year.
II.    Arts and Science, and Engineering:
Two complete years in Arts and Science and four complete years in Applied Science are required for a Double
Degree. Consequently students must not select courses in
Arts and Science that are included in the Applied Science
years, on account of time-table difficulties.
The requirements for the first and second years are as
set forth in the Calendar for the first and second years of
Arts (Pages 77-79) except as follows:
1. Physics 1 or 2 and Chemistry 1 must be taken. The
passing grade for each of these subjects and for
Algebra, Geometry and Trigonometry is fifty per
cent. (See also, admission to Applied Science, Page
180). Students are recommended to take Mathematics 2 (c)  (calculus).
2. Biology 1, Chemistry 2, Geology 1, Mathematics 2
(a) and 2 (b), and Physics 3 or 5 or 6 may not be
taken. These subjects are covered later in Applied
Science.
3. A course in German is recommended (and, for those
intending to enter Geological or Civil Engineering,
French also). Two years in the language elected
is necessary to count towards a degree.
The third, fourth, fifth and sixth years of the double
course correspond to the second, third, fourth and fifth years
of Applied Science. The degree of B.A. is conferred on
completing the fifth year of this course. 216 Faculty of Applied Science
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.Sc.
1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Applied Science must hold a B.A.Sc. degree from this University, or
its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his application an official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the
several subjects of his course. The Faculty will determine
the standing of such a student in this University. The fee
for examination of certificates is $2.00.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic
records who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
(a.) To spend one year in resident graduate study;
or
(b.)   (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned) :
(i.)  To do two or more years of private work
under the supervision of the University,
such work to be equivalent to one year
of graduate study; or
(ii.)  To do one year of private work under
University supervision and one term of
resident graduate  study,  the total  of
such work to be equivalent to one year
of resident graduate study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required and a
thesis must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject.    (Two typewritten copies of each thesis shall  '*„
be submitted.    See special circular of "Instructions for
the Preparation of Masters' Theses.")
The choice of and relationship between major and minor
subjects, and the amount of work in each, or of tutorial       *
work, must be approved by each of the departments concerned, by the Committee on graduate studies, and by the
Dean.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher
Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each
r* Examinations and Advancement 217
of (1) History and Principles of Education, and in (2)
Educational Psychology, is accepted as equivalent to a Minor
i? for an M.A.Sc. degree, subject in each case to the consent
of the Head of the Department in which the student wishes
to take his Major.
5. Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required, and a standing equivalent to at least 75 per cent, in
b»       the major subjects and 65 per cent, in the minor.
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall
be made to the Registrar by October 1st. For fees see pages
50-53.
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations are held in December and in April.
December examinations will be held in all subjects of the
Second and Third Years, and are obligatory for all stu-
*' dents of these years. December examinations in subjects
of the Fourth and Fifth Years, excepting those subjects
that are completed before Christmas, shall be optional with
the Departments concerned. Applications for special consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must
be submitted to the Dean,not later than two days after the
close of the examination period. In cases where illness is
* j the plea for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented on the appropriate form which
may be obtained from the Dean's office, or if the illness
occurs at the University the student may report to the Nurse,
Auditorium Bldg., who may furnish the necessary certificate.
2. Candidates in order to pass must obtain at least
50 per cent, in each subject. The grades are as follows:
First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class,
65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. But in the First
and Second Years of the course in Nursing and Health the
requirements for passing are the same as those for the First
and Second Years in Arts and Science, namely
(a)  50 per cent, or over in each paper, or
(6)  60 per cent, on the total with a minimum   of  40
r 218 Faculty of Applied Science
per cent, in each paper provided the whole examination is taken at one time.
3. If a student's general standing in the final examinations of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant
him supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects
in which he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students
to whom such examinations have been granted.
4. Supplemental examinations will be held on September
16th, 17th, 18th and 19th. Special examinations will not
be granted, except by special permission* of the Faculty,
and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper, and then only
during the third week in October or the second week of
January.
5. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees, Pages
50-53) must be in the hands of the Registrar at least two
weeks before the date set for the examinations.
6. No student may enter the third or higher year with
supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of
more than 4 units of the preceeding year, or with any supplemental examination outstanding in respect of the work
of an earlier year unless special permission* to do so is
granted by Faculty. Students in Nursing A must remove
all outstanding supplemental examinations before entering
their third year.
7. No student will be allowed to take any subject unless
he has previously passed, or secured exemption, in all prerequisite subjects. If any subject has another which is
concurrent with it, both must be taken in the same session.
8. A student who is required to repeat his year will not
be allowed to take any work in a higher year. Such a student need not repeat, however, any of the following subjects:
in which he has made 65 per cent.: Civil Engineering 2, 5,
7,13, or Mechanical Engineering 1 or 2a.
9. A student who fails twice in the work of the same
year may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be re-
■   •Special  permission  of  the  Faculty is   granted  only under  exceptional   circumstances, such as illness, or as outlined on Page 183. Botany 219
quired by the Senate to withdraw from the University.
10. Any student whose academic record, as determined
by the tests and examinations of the first term of the Sec- .
ond or Third Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon
the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the
Senate to discontinue attendance at the University for the
remainder of the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding.
11. Term essays and examination papers will be refused
a passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English.
12. Honours will be granted in any one of the last four
years to students who obtain at least 50 per cent, in each
subject and 80 per cent, on the whole at the annual examinations of that year.
13. Honour graduate standing will be granted to those
who obtain honours in the final year and who have passed
any one of the three preceding years with at least 50 per
cent in each subject and 75 per cent, on the whole.
DEPARTMENTS IN APPLIED SCIENCE
N.B.—The following subjects may be modified during the
year as the Senate may deem advisable.
Department of Botany
Professor:  A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor: Frank Dickson.
Associate Professor: John Davidson.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory
to more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to
courses closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and
division of labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
Text-book: Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea &
Febiger, 1924. 220 Faculty of Applied Science
The course is prerequisite to all other courses in Biology.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory
per week.
2. Principles of Genetics.—As in Arts.   See Page 109.
3. General Physiology.—As in Arts.    See Page 109.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of the several fields of Botany and introductory to more
specialized courses in Botany.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany.   Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
This course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany except the Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units) toward
Botany may be obtained through the Evening Course. (See
Page 114).
Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory
per week.
2. Morphology.—As in Arts.    See Page 110.
3. Plant Physiology.—As in Arts.   See Page 110.
4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development
of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of
microscope, camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-book: W. C. Stevens, Plant Anatomy, P. Blakiston.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory
per week.   Second Term.
5. Systematic Botany.
5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of
economic plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial arts; harmful to crops and
stock.   Weeds and poisonous plants.    Methods of control.
Prerequisite:    Botany 1.
Text-books: Jepson, Economic   Plants   of   California, Botany 221
Jepson University of California. Thomas and Sifton,
Poisonous Plants and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto
Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First
Term.
5. (6) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of
Canada, the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of the United States which are not native
to Canada. Emphasis on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance,
construction of keys.
Prerequisite:   Botany 1.
Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa. Sudworth, Forest
Trees of the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D.C; Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers,
Junipers and Yew, T. F. Unwin.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory or field work per week.
5. (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—As in Arts. See Page
112.
6. (6) Foriest Pathology.—Nature, identification and
control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and
other plant parasites of forests.
Text-book: Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week during one-half of one term.
6. (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary). — A course
similar to 6(a), but including more details concerning the
dieases studied.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite:    Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory a week. Second
Term. 222 Faculty of Applied Science
7. (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The inter-relations of forests and their environment; the biological
characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions; physiography.
Reference books: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British Columbia, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forests of the
World, McGraw-Hill; Hardy, The Geography of ■ Plants,
Oxford University Press.
One lecture per week during one term. Field trips and
laboratory work during the session amounting to thirty
hours, one period per week.
Department of Chemistry
Professor: R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald.
Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: William Ure.
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give
a full exposition of the general principles involved in modern Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the
properties of the more important metallic and non-metallic
elements and their compounds, and the application of
Chemistry in technology.
Text-book: Smith's College Chemistry, revised by
Kendall, 1929 Edn., Century Co.
Three lectures and one period of three hours laboratory
per week.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—During the first six weeks
of the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a
part of the laboratory work.
Text-book: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
For reference: F. W. Millar, Elementary Theory of
Qualitative Analysis, Century Co.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. CHEMISTRY 223
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory
per week.
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the
more important methods of gravimetric and volumetric
analysis.
Text-book: Engelder, Elementary Quantitative Analysis, John Wiley & Sons.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory
per week.
Course (6) must be preceded by Course (a).
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study
of the compounds of carbon will include the method of
preparation and a description of the more important groups
of compounds in both the fatty and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will also be given to those students taking
Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of
Chemistry 2.
Text-books: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic
Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods of
Organic Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory
per week.
4. (a) Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course
in the development of modern theoretical chemistry, including a study of gases, liquids and solids, solutions, ionization and electrical conductivity, chemical equilibrium,
kinetics of reactions, thermochemistry and thermodynamics, colloids.
Text-book: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges,
McGraw-Hill.
References: Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan. For laboratory use: Findlay, Practical Physical Chemistry, Longmans; and Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physical-Chemical Principles, MacMillan.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2 (except for students major- 224 Faculty of Applied Science
ing in Physics). Honor students majoring in Chemistry
should take Mathematics 10 concurrently.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.
3 units.
4. (b) This course is the same as Chemistry 4 (a) with
the omission of the laboratory, and is open only to students
not majoring in Chemistry. 2 units.
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis,
(a)   Qualitative Analysis.—The work of   this   course
will include the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly those that are important industrially, together with the analysis of somewhat complex
substances occurring in nature.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory
per week.   First Term.
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made
will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of
rocks, as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys.
The principles on which analytical chemistry is based will
receive a more minute consideration than was possible in
the elementary course.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory
per week.   Second Term.
6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries which are
dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be
considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing
establishments in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that
some lectures will be given by specialists in their respective fields.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures per week.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation
of Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory
of gases, properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and thermochemistry, properties of solutions, Chemistry 225
theoretical electrochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics
of reactions, radioactivity.
Books recommended: Getman, Outlines of Theoretical
Chemistry, Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; for Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments on Physico-Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical Physical Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and three hours' laboratory per week.
3 units.
8. Electrochemistry.—
(a) As in Arts.    (See Page 118).
(b) Electric furnaces, electrolytic refining and deposi
tion of metals will be studied in detail.
Text-book: Thompson, Theoretical and Applied Electrochemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.
Second Term. IV2 units.
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See
Page 118). A*m± ► .
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See
Page 119).      a
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—As in Arts.    (See Page 119).
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
16. Chemical Engineering.—Theory and design of fractionating columns, condensers, multiple effect evaporators;
chamber, tunnel, drum, rotary and spray driers. Theory
and practice of technical filtration; calculation of capacity
of box filters, filter presses, centrifugals, etc. Principles
of counter current extraction.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4.
Text-book: Walker, Lewis & McAdams, Principles of
Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Liddell, Handbook of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill; Robinson, Elements of Practical Distillation, McGraw-Hill. 226 Faculty of Applied Science
Two lectures per week.
The following firms have kindly permitted the students
in Chemical Engineering to work one day a week in their
plants as part of their practical training:
British Columbia Electric Railway Co. (Gas Department) .
Sherwin-Williams Co. of Canada, Limited.
Royal Crown Soaps, Limited.
Imperial Oil Company, Limited.
B. C. Refractories, Limited.
Triangle Chemical Company, Limited.
Westminster Paper Mills.
Canadian Carbonate, Limited.
17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—As in Arts. (See
Page 119).
(Given in 1933-34 and alternate years.)
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See
Page 119).
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
21. Chemical Kinetics.—As in Arts.    (See Page 120).
(Given in 1932-33 and alternate years.)
Department of Civil Engineering
Professor: 	
Associate Professor: E. G. Matheson.
Assistant Professor: F. A. Wilkin.
Assistant Professor: A. H. Finlay.
Assistant Professor:  A. Lighthall.
Instructor: A. G. Stuart.
Instructor: E. S. Pretious.
Assistant: Archie Peebles.
1. Descriptive Geometry.—Geometrical drawing, orthographic, isometric and axometric projections.
Text-book: Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, second
edition, Wiley.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Matheson, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Wilkin,
Mr. Peebles, Mr. Pretious.
2. Field Work 1.—Elementary surveying. Practical
problems involving the use of the chain, telemeter,   com- Civil Engineering 227
pass, transit and level. Traverses, closed circuits, contour
and detail surveys. Levels for profiles, benches and contours.
Work commences immediately upon the close of spring
examinations, and consists of field work, eight hours per
day for twenty days, or equivalent.
Mr. Stuart, Mr. Matheson, Mr. Pretious.
4. Graphical Statics.—Elementary theory of structures;
composition of forces; general methods invol